FNA-A - Air-conditioner DAIKIN - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free FNA-A DAIKIN in PDF.

View the manual :

Manual assistant

Waiting for your message

Product information

Brand : DAIKIN

Model : FNA-A

Category : Air-conditioner

Download the PDF manual Print

Download the instructions for your Air-conditioner in PDF format for free! Find your manual FNA-A - DAIKIN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. FNA-A by DAIKIN.

USER MANUAL FNA-A DAIKIN

1. Introduction vii 1.1 Safety Cautions vii 1.2 Used Icons xi

Part 1 List of Functions 1 1. Cooling Only2 1.1 Outdoor Unit 2 1.2 Indoor Unit3

2. Heat Pump 6 2.1 Outdoor Unit 6 2.2 Indoor Unit7

Part 2 Specifications 14 1. Cooling Only15 1.1 Outdoor Unit 15 1.2 Indoor Unit17

2. Heat Pump 22 2.1 Outdoor Unit 22 2.2 Indoor Unit25

FTXG25/35/50JV1BW(A) 41 FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B 44 FTXS25/35/42/50J2V1B46 FTXS60/71GV1B49 FVXG25/35/50K2V1B 52 FVXS25/35/50FV1B 55 FLXS25/35/50/60BAVMB57 FDXS25/35E7VMB, FDXS50/60C7VMB59 FCQG35/50/60FVEB61 FFQ25/35/50/60B9V1B 64 FHQ35/50/60BWV1B 66 FDBQ25B8V168 FBQ35/50/60C8VEB 70

3. Wired Remote Controller73 3.1 BRC1D528 73 3.2 BRC1E52A7, BRC1E52B774

Part 4 Function and Control 75 1. Indoor Unit Control (RA Models) 76 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7

Temperature Control 76 Frequency Principle76 Operation Starting Control78 Airflow Direction Control79 Fan Speed Control for Indoor Unit 82 RADIANT Operation83 Program Dry Operation 85

Table of Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Drain Pump Control99 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller101 Freeze Prevention Control 103 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)104

Part 6 Service Diagnosis 248 1. Troubleshooting with LED 250 1.1 Indoor Unit250 1.2 Outdoor Unit 252

4.1 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series267 4.2 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 267 4.3 Sub Codes for SA Indoor Unit 268 4.4 Outdoor Unit 269

5. Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series 270 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality 270 Freeze-up Protection Control or Heating Peak-cut Control272 Fan Motor or Related Abnormality 274 Radiant Panel Temperature Rise, Indoor Electronic Expansion Valve (Motor Operated Valve) Abnormality, Freeze-up Protection Control (FVXG Series Only)278 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (RA Indoor Unit)280 Front Panel Open / Close Fault (FTXG Series Only) 281 Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) ....282 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) 283

6. Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series284 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8

Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality 284 Drain Water Level System Abnormality285 Fan Motor or Related Abnormality 287 Swing Motor Lock (FHQ Series Only) 289 Drain System Abnormality290 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (SA Indoor Unit)291 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality 292 Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Remote Controller)293 6.9 Signal Transmission Error (between MAIN Remote Controller and SUB Remote Controller)294 6.10 Field Setting Abnormality 295

7. Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit296 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19

Refrigerant Shortage 296 Low-voltage Detection or Over-voltage Detection298 Signal Transmission Error (on Outdoor Unit PCB)300 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) / Anti-icing Function in Other Rooms301 Anti-icing Function302 Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality304 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) 305 Compressor Lock 306 DC Fan Lock 307 Input Overcurrent Detection 308 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control309 High Pressure Control in Cooling 310 Compressor Sensor System Abnormality 311 Position Sensor Abnormality 313 CT or Related Abnormality 315 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)317 Electrical Box Temperature Rise319 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise 321 Output Overcurrent Detection 323

Table of Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Removal of Outer Panels 337 Removal of Electrical Box 341 Removal of PCBs 349 Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor354 Removal of Sound Blankets 356 Removal of Coils / Thermistors 360 Removal of Distributor363 Removal of Four Way Valve364 Removal of Compressor365

2. Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class367 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

Removal of Outer Panels 367 Removal of Electrical Box 382 Removal of PCBs 388 Removal of Fan Motor392 Removal of Coils / Thermistors 393 Removal of Sound Blankets 399 Removal of Compressor402

Part 8 Trial Operation and Field Settings 403 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pump Down Operation404 Forced Operation 405 Wiring Error Check Function 406 Trial Operation 408 4.1 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series408 4.2 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 410

5. Field Settings 412 5.1 Outdoor Unit 412 5.2 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series415 5.3 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 419 v Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge 423

Part 9 Appendix 424 1. Piping Diagrams425 1.1 Outdoor Unit 425 1.2 Indoor Unit430

2. Wiring Diagrams437 2.1 Outdoor Unit 437 2.2 Indoor Unit442

Table of Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cautions and Warnings

Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work. The caution items are classified into “ Warning” and “ Caution”. The “ Warning” items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not followed closely. The “ Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below. About the pictograms This symbol indicates the item for which caution must be exercised. The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid. This symbol indicates the prohibited action. The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol. This symbol indicates the action that must be taken, or the instruction. The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol. After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the customer.

1.1.1 Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers Warning Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before disassembling the equipment for repair. Working on the equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause an electrical shock. If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the equipment. If the refrigerant gas is discharged during the repair work, do not touch the discharged refrigerant gas. The refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated place first. If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it may cause injury. If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical components of the outdoor unit. Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work. A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.

Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the power cable plug. Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment may cause an electrical shock or fire.

vii Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when working at a high place (more than 2 m). Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall accident.

In case of R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare nuts and tools for the exclusive use of the R-410A refrigerant. The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious accident such as a damage of refrigerant cycle as well as an equipment failure.

Caution Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands. Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water. Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.

Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning the equipment. The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools. The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down enough before conducting repair work. Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause burns.

Use the welder in a well-ventilated place. Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.

viii Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Safety of Users Warning Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the equipment. The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to replace them. Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the local technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring regulations, and the instruction manual for installation when conducting electrical work. Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause an electrical shock or fire. Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and outdoor units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals. Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.

When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable. If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.

Do not damage or modify the power cable. Damaged or modified power cable may cause an electrical shock or fire. Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable may damage the cable.

Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system. If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results, causing equipment damage and injury.

If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and repair it before charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there is no refrigerant leak. If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure to perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan and other heaters, stoves and ranges. When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment. If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.

ix Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert the plug into a power outlet securely. If the plug has dust or loose connection, it may cause an electrical shock or fire.

Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard For unitary type installation frame. only Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation may cause the equipment to fall, resulting in injury.

Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on the For unitary type window frame. only If the unit is not securely mounted, it may fall and cause injury.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it. If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.

Caution Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of combustible gas leaks. If the combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.

Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure. Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat generation, fire or an electrical shock.

If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it. Corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall, resulting in injury.

Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded. Improper grounding may cause an electrical shock.

x Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Caution Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure that the resistance is 1 MΩ or higher. Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair. Faulty drainage may cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture and floor.

Do not tilt the unit when removing it. The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.

Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly. For unitary type If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water may enter the room and only wet the furniture and floor.

Used Icons Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each icon is described in the table below: Icon

A “caution” is used when there is danger that the reader, through incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.

A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.

A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a specific topic.

A “note” provides information that is not indispensable, but may nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.

Part 1 List of Functions 1. Cooling Only2 1.1 Outdoor Unit 2 1.2 Indoor Unit3

2. Heat Pump 6 2.1 Outdoor Unit 6 2.2 Indoor Unit7

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Standby Electricity Saving Oval Scroll Compressor

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Swing Compressor Rotary Compressor Reluctance DC Motor Comfortable Airflow

MOLD PROOF Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Program Dry Operation

New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button

Signal Receiving Sign

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

High Ceiling Application

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Program Dry Operation

New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option) Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Pulse Contact) (Option) Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Contact) (Option)

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down) Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

HOME LEAVE Operation

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option) Remote Controller

Wireless Wired (Option)

ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign

: Holding Functions — : No Functions

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Oval Scroll Compressor

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Self-Cleaning Decoration Panel (Option)

Power-Airflow Diffuser

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Schedule Timer Operation

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

NIGHT SET Mode Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

High Ceiling Application

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (Non-Inverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Temperature Display

Program Dry Operation Lifestyle Convenience

Air-Purifying Filter

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Wireless (Option) Wired (Option)

1: with wireless remote controller 2: with wired remote controller

Oval Scroll Compressor

Swing Compressor Rotary Compressor Reluctance DC Motor Comfortable Airflow

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Self-Cleaning Decoration Panel (Option)

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Schedule Timer Operation

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

High Ceiling Application

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Temperature Display

Program Dry Operation Lifestyle Convenience

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1: with wireless remote controller 2: with wired remote controller

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

High Ceiling Application

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Automatic Defrosting Automatic Operation

Program Dry Operation

New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Lifestyle Convenience

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

4MXS80E2V3B, 5MXS90E2V3B Basic Function

3MXS40K2V1B, 3MXS52E3V1B

3MXS68G2V1B, 4MXS68F2V1B Category

4MXS80E2V3B, 5MXS90E2V3B Outdoor Unit 3MXS40K2V1B, 3MXS52E3V1B 3MXS68G2V1B, 4MXS68F2V1B

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button

Signal Receiving Sign

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

WEEKLY TIMER Operation

24-Hour ON/OFF TIMER Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation Auto Fan Speed Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display Wiring Error Check Function

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible Indoor Unit

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left) —

Power Selection Remote Control

Program Dry Operation

New POWERFUL Operation (Non-Inverter)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Contact) (Option)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Wireless Wired (Option)

ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp (Multi-Monitor Lamp) R/C with Back Light Temperature Display

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Auto Fan Speed Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

WEEKLY TIMER Operation NIGHT SET Mode

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation Flexibility —

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Program Dry Operation

New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

FTXS20/25K2V1B Category

CTXS15/35K2V1B SiBE121135

FTXS20/25K2V1B Heat Pump

HOME LEAVE Operation

Wireless Wired (Option)

ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp (MultiMonitor Lamp) R/C with Back Light Temperature Display

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control) Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB)

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

WEEKLY TIMER Operation 24-Hour ON/OFF TIMER NIGHT SET Mode

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure) Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

High Ceiling Application

Auto Fan Speed Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

FTXS60/71GV1B Heat Pump

FTXS25/35/42/50J2V1B SiBE121135

Power Selection Remote Control

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Program Dry Operation

Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Pulse Contact) (Option)

New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp (MultiMonitor Lamp)

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option) Remote Controller

Wireless Wired (Option)

ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign

: Holding Functions — : No Functions

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control) Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB)

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Auto Fan Speed Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

High Ceiling Application

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option) Remote Controller

Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (Non-Inverter)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Contact) (Option)

Program Dry Operation Lifestyle Convenience

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Category

FVXS25/35/50FV1B SiBE121135

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Heat Pump

Wireless Wired (Option)

HOME LEAVE Operation

ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp (MultiMonitor Lamp) R/C with Back Light Temperature Display

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control) Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

NIGHT SET Mode Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

High Ceiling Application

Auto Fan Speed Indoor Unit Quiet Operation NIGHT QUIET Mode (Automatic)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Automatic Operation Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option) Remote Control Adaptor (Normal Open Pulse Contact) (Option)

Program Dry Operation Lifestyle Convenience

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp (MultiMonitor Lamp)

Wireless Wired (Option)

HOME LEAVE Operation ECONO Operation Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign

: Holding Functions — : No Functions

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control) Operation Limit for Cooling (°CDB)

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Self-Cleaning Decoration Panel (Option)

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Schedule Timer Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Program Dry Operation Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Temperature Display

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Air-Purifying Filter Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option) Remote Controller

Wireless (Option) Wired (Option)

1: with wireless remote controller 2: with wired remote controller

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Oval Scroll Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Self-Cleaning Decoration Panel (Option)

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

MOLD PROOF Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor Heat Exchanger

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

H/P, C/O Compatible Indoor Unit

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function (Preheating Operation)

Chargeless Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

5-Room Centralized Controller (Option)

Program Dry Operation Fan Only New POWERFUL Operation (NonInverter)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button Signal Receiving Sign Temperature Display

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Lifestyle Convenience

Schedule Timer Operation

NIGHT SET Mode Worry Free “Reliability & Durability”

Hot-Start Function Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

List of Functions Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1: with wireless remote controller 2: with wired remote controller

2. Heat Pump 22 2.1 Outdoor Unit 22 2.2 Indoor Unit25

50 Hz, 230 V Model Casing Color Type Model Motor Output Model Refrigerant Oil Charge Type Refrigerant Charge H L Airflow Rate H L Type Motor Output Fan Running Current Power Consumption Starting Current Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure Level Sound Power Level Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Heat Insulation No. of Wiring Connection Compressor

Max. Interunit Piping Length Amount of Additional Charge Max. Installation Height Difference

3MKS50E3V1B Ivory White Hermetically Sealed Swing Type 2YC36BXD 1,100 FVC50K 0.65 R-410A 2.0 45 45 1,589 1,589 Propeller 53 H: 0.33 / L: 0.33 H: 43 / L: 43 5.3 735 × 936 × 300 797 × 992 × 390 49 56 46 59 φ 6.4 × 3 φ 9.5 × 3 φ 18.0 Both Liquid and Gas Pipes 3 for Power Supply, 4 for Interunit Wiring 50 (for Total of Each Room) 25 (for One Room) Chargeless 15 (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) 15 (between Indoor Units) 3D054330#1

The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below. Cooling

Indoor ; 27°CDB / 19°CWB Outdoor ; 35°CDB

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

50 Hz, 230 V Model Casing Color Type Model Motor Output Model Refrigerant Oil Charge Type Refrigerant Charge H M L Airflow Rate H M L Type Motor Output Fan Running Current Power Consumption Starting Current Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure Level Sound Power Level Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Heat Insulation No. of Wiring Connection Compressor

Max. Interunit Piping Length Amount of Additional Charge Max. Installation Height Difference

The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below. Cooling

Wall Mounted Type 50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type 50 Hz, 230 V Model Rated Capacity Model Color Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) H Airflow Rate L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Decoration Panel

Model Rated Capacity Model Color Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) H Airflow Rate L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Decoration Panel

mm kg m³/min (cfm) W Steps A W %

( ) : dimension including control box Conversion Formulae kcal/h = kW × 860 Btu/h = kW × 3412 cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ceiling Suspended Type 50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V Model Rated Capacity Panel Color H L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Airflow Rate

Model Rated Capacity Panel Color H L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Airflow Rate

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type 50 Hz, 230 V Model Rated Capacity Decoration Panel

Model Color Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) kg H m³/min L Type Motor Output W Speed Steps

Air Filter Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power H/L Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain

Model Rated Capacity Decoration Panel

Air Filter Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power H / L Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit 50 Hz, 230 V

Casing Color Type Model Motor Output Model Refrigerant Oil Charge Type Refrigerant Charge H L Airflow Rate H L Type Motor Output Fan Running Current Power Consumption Starting Current Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure Level Sound Power Level Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Heat Insulation No. of Wiring Connection Compressor

Max. Interunit Piping Length Amount of Additional Charge Max. Installation Height Difference

Heating Ivory White Hermetically Sealed Swing Type 2YC36BXD 1,100 FVC50K 0.65 R-410A 2.0 45 45 41 41 1,589 1,589 1,448 1,448 Propeller 53 H: 0.33 / L: 0.29 H: 43 / L: 34 4.0 735 × 936 × 300 797 × 992 × 390 49 56 46 47 59 60 φ 6.4 × 3 φ 9.5 × 3 φ 18.0 Both Liquid and Gas Pipes 3 for Power Supply, 4 for Interunit Wiring 50 (for Total of Each Room) 25 (for One Room) 20 (30 m or more) 15 (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) 7.5 (between Indoor Units) 3D074741

Heating Ivory White Hermetically Sealed Swing Type 2YC36BXD 1,100 FVC50K 0.65 R-410A 2.0 45 45 45 41 1,589 1,589 1,589 1,448 Propeller 53 H: 0.33 / L: 0.29 H: 43 / L: 34 6.2 735 × 936 × 300 797 × 992 × 390 49 56 46 47 59 60 φ 6.4 × 3 φ 9.5 × 2, φ 12.7 × 1 φ 18.0 Both Liquid and Gas Pipes 3 for Power Supply, 4 for Interunit Wiring 50 (for Total of Each Room) 25 (for One Room) 20 (30 m or more) 15 (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) 7.5 (between Indoor Units) 3D054327#1

The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below. Cooling

kcal/h = kW × 860 Btu/h = kW × 3412 cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Casing Color Type Model Motor Output Model Refrigerant Oil Charge Type Refrigerant Charge H M L Airflow Rate H M L Type Motor Output Fan Running Current Power Consumption Starting Current Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure Level Sound Power Level Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Heat Insulation No. of Wiring Connection Compressor

Max. Interunit Piping Length Amount of Additional Charge Max. Installation Height Difference

The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below. Cooling

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

kcal/h = kW × 860 Btu/h = kW × 3412 cfm = m³/min × 35.3

Max. Interunit Piping Length Amount of Additional Charge Max. Installation Height Difference

The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below. Cooling

kcal/h = kW × 860 Btu/h = kW × 3412 cfm = m³/min × 35.3

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FTXG25JV1BW Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

3D066436A FTXG35JV1BW Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

3.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 3.5 kW Class Silver

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FTXG50JV1BW Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

5.0 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

3D072083A CTXS15K2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

1.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 2.0 kW Class White

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FTXS25K2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

FTXS25J2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 3.5 kW Class White

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FTXS42J2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

4.2 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 5.0 kW Class White

3D070568A FTXS60GV1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

6.0 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 7.1 kW Class White

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FVXG25K2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

FVXG50K2V1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Heating 5.0 kW Class White

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FVXS25FV1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class White m³/min (cfm)

FVXS50FV1B Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Heating 5.0 kW Class White

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FLXS25BAVMB Model Rated Capacity Front Panel Color H M Airflow Rate L SL Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

2.5 kW Class Almond White m³/min (cfm)

3.5 kW Class Almond White

5.0 kW Class Almond White m³/min (cfm)

Heating 6.0 kW Class Almond White

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.0 kW Class H M L SL Type Motor Output Speed

Air Filter Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H / M / L / SL Level Sound Power Level External Static Pressure Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No.

Heating 6.0 kW Class

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

Rated Capacity Model Color Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Air Filter H Airflow Rate M L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/M/L Level Sound Power H Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Decoration Panel

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rated Capacity Model Color Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) H Airflow Rate L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Running Current (Rated) Power Consumption (Rated) Power Factor (Rated) Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Decoration Panel

Heating 3.5 kW Class BYFQ60B8W1 White 55 × 700 × 700 2.7

Turbo Fan 55 2 Steps Horizontal, Downward

Heating 2.5 kW Class BYFQ60B8W1 White 55 × 700 × 700 2.7

( ) : dimension including control box

Heating 6.0 kW Class BYFQ60B8W1 White 55 × 700 × 700 2.7

Ceiling Suspended Type

50 Hz, 220 - 230 - 240 V FHQ35BWV1B Model

Rated Capacity Panel Color H L Type Fan Motor Output Speed Air Direction Control Air Filter Temperature Control Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain Drawing No. Airflow Rate

13.0 (459) 10.0 (353)

Heating 5.0 kW Class White

Heating 6.0 kW Class White

Specifications Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rated Capacity Decoration Panel

Air Filter Dimensions (H × W × D) Packaged Dimensions (H × W × D) Weight (Mass) Gross Weight (Gross Mass) Sound Pressure H/L Level Sound Power H / L Level Heat Insulation Liquid Piping Gas Connection Drain

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Outdoor Unit Connectors and Other Parts

PCB (1): Main PCB 1) S10 2) S15 3) 4) 5) 6)

S20 (white) S21 (red) S22 (blue) S23 (yellow)

7) S24 (green) 8) S40 9) S51, S101 10)S70 11)S80 12)S90

13)S92 14)S93 15)AC1, AC2 16)HR1, HR2 17)E1, E2 18)U, V, W 19) FU1 20)FU2, FU3 21)V2, V3, V5 V6, V11 V9, V100

Connector for terminal board (indoor - outdoor transmission) Connector for COOL / HEAT mode lock ∗ Refer to page 413 for detail. Connector for electronic expansion valve coil A port Connector for electronic expansion valve coil B port Connector for electronic expansion valve coil C port Connector for electronic expansion valve coil D port (for 4 and 5-room model) Connector for electronic expansion valve coil E port (for 5-room model only) Connector for overload protector Connector for service monitor PCB Connector for outdoor fan motor Connector for four way valve coil Connector for thermistors (outdoor temperature, outdoor heat exchanger, discharge pipe temperature) Connector for gas pipe thermistors Connector for liquid pipe thermistors Connector for terminal board (power supply) Connector for reactor Connector for earth Connector for compressor Fuse (30 A, 250 V) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V) Varistor (for 40 - 58 class) (for 68 - 90 class)

38 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for main PCB LED for service monitor (green) LED for service monitor (red) LED for service monitor (red) (for 5-room model only) Forced operation [ON/OFF] switch ∗ Refer to page 405 for detail. Operation mode switch ∗ Refer to page 405 for detail. Wiring error check switch ∗ Refer to page 406 for detail. Priority room setting switch ∗ Refer to page 412 for detail. NIGHT QUIET mode setting switch ∗ Refer to page 414 for detail.

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB (1): Main PCB (40/50/52/58 class) AC1

PCB (1): Main PCB (68/75 class) AC1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PCB (1): Main PCB (80/90 class) AC1

V100 HR1 (white) HR2 (blue)

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Connectors and Other Parts

[A1P]: Control PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)

S21 S25 S32 S41 S42 S46 S200 H1, H2, H3, FG

9) JB JC Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for INTELLIGENT EYE sensor PCB Indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for swing motors Connector for reduction motor (front panel mechanism) and limit switch Connector for signal receiver / display PCB Connector for fan motor Connector for terminal board

10) LED A 11) F1U 12) V1

Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function (auto-restart) ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V) Varistor

[A2P]: Signal Receiver / Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

S1W H1P H2P JA Connector for control PCB Connector for room temperature thermistor Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (multi-color) LED for INTELLIGENT EYE (green) Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail.

[A3P]: INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB 1) S36

Connector for control PCB Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B Connectors and Other Parts

PCB(1): Control PCB 1) S6 2) S25 3) S26 4) S32 5) S200 6) S403 7) FG1, FG2 8) H1, H2, H3 9) V1 10)JA 11)JB JC 12)LED A 13)FU1 (F1U)

Connector for swing motor (horizontal blade) Connector for INTELLIGENT EYE sensor PCB Connector for display PCB Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for fan motor Connector for adaptor PCB (option) Connector for terminal board (frame ground) Connector for terminal board (indoor - outdoor transmission) Varistor Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function (auto-restart) ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)

PCB (2): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

S27 SW1 (S1W) LED1 (H1P) LED2 (H2P) LED3 (H3P) RTH1 (R1T)

Connector for control PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow) LED for INTELLIGENT EYE (green) Room temperature thermistor

PCB (3): INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB 1) S36

44 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for control PCB Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

S1 S21 S25 S32 S41 S46 S47 H1, H2, H3, FG 9) JA 10) JB JC 11) LED A 12) FU1 (F1U) 13) V1

Connector for DC fan motor Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for INTELLIGENT EYE sensor PCB Indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for swing motors Connector for display PCB Connector for signal receiver PCB Connector for terminal board Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function (auto-restart) ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V) Varistor

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB 1) S48

Connector for control PCB PCB (3): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

S49 SW1 LED1 (H1P) LED2 (H2P) LED3 (H3P) RTH1 (R1T)

Connector for control PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow) LED for INTELLIGENT EYE (green) Room temperature thermistor

PCB (4): INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB 1) S26

46 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for control PCB Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB S48

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

FTXS60/71GV1B Connectors and Other Parts

PCB (1): Control PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)

S1 S21 S25 S32 S41 S46 S47 H1, H2, H3, FG 9) V1

10)JA Connector for DC fan motor Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for INTELLIGENT EYE sensor PCB Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for swing motors Connector for display PCB Connector for signal receiver PCB Connector for terminal board

11) JB JC Varistor Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function (auto-restart) ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green) Fuse (3.15 A, 250 V)

12)LED A 13)FU1 (F1U)

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB 1) S48

Connector for control PCB PCB (3): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

S49 SW1 LED1 (H1P) LED2 (H2P) LED3 (H3P) RTH1 (R1T)

Connector for control PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow) LED for INTELLIGENT EYE (green) Room temperature thermistor

PCB (4): INTELLIGENT EYE Sensor PCB 1) S36

Connector for control PCB Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

H1 FU1 (3.15A) H2 FG H3

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

PCB (2): Signal Receiver PCB S48

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Connectors and Other Parts

S1 S2 S6 S21 S26 S30

15)LED A Connector for fan motor Connector for terminal board Connector for swing motor Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for service PCB Connector for indoor electronic expansion valve coil (motor operated valve coil) Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for radiant panel thermistors Connector for display PCB Connector for earth Varistor Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. Fuse (3.15A, 250V) LED for service monitor (green)

PCB (2): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

S1W H1P H2P H3P Connector for main PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow) LED for RADIANT operation (red)

PCB (3): Service PCB 1) S27 2) S2W-1

52 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for main PCB Address setting switch ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. ∗ Keep the other switches as factory setting (OFF).

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

FVXS25/35/50FV1B Connectors and Other Parts

PCB (1): Sensor PCB 1) S49 2) RTH2 (R1T)

Connector for control PCB Room temperature thermistor

PCB (2): Control PCB 1) S1 2) S21 3) S26 4) S32 5) S41 6) S42 7) S46 8) S48 9) H1, H2, H3 10)E1 11)V1, V2 12)JA 13)JB JC 14) FU1 (F1U)

15) LED A Connector for fan motor Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for service PCB Indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for lower air outlet motor Connector for swing motor Connector for display PCB Connector for sensor PCB Connector for terminal board Terminal for earth Varistor Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. Fuse (3.15A, 250V) LED for service monitor (green)

PCB (3): Service PCB 1) S27 2) SW2-4

Connector for control PCB Switch for upward airflow limit setting ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. ∗ Keep the other switches as factory setting. Switch for air outlet selection ∗ Refer to page 185, 195 for detail.

PCB (4): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4)

S47 SW1 (S1W) LED1 (H1P) LED2 (H2P)

Connector for control PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow)

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LED3 does not function.

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

11) LED A Connector for swing motor (horizontal swing) Connector for AC fan motor Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for display PCB Connector for signal receiver PCB Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for power supply PCB Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. Select switch for installation (ceiling or floor) ∗ Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green)

PCB (2): Power Supply PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

S36 H1, H2, H3 H4, H5, H6 V1 FU1

PCB (3): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4)

Connector for control PCB LED for operation (green) LED for timer (yellow) LED for HOME LEAVE operation (red)

PCB (4): Signal Receiver PCB 1) S27 2) S31 (RTH) 3) SW1 (S1W)

Connector for control PCB Room temperature thermistor Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PCB (2): Power Supply PCB H4

PCB (4): Signal Receiver PCB WLU C3

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

FDXS25/35E7VMB, FDXS50/60C7VMB Connectors and Other Parts

S1 S7 S21 S26 S32 H1, H2, H3 GND JA

Connector for AC fan motor Connector for AC fan motor (Hall IC) Connector for centralized control (HA) Connector for display PCB Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for terminal board Connector for terminal board (earth) Address setting jumper ∗ Refer to page 415 for detail. Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF Power failure recovery function (auto-restart) Refer to page 418 for detail. LED for service monitor (green) Fuse (3.15A, 250V) Varistor

PCB (2): Display PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

S1 SW1 (S1W) LED1 (H1P) LED2 (H2P) LED3 (H3P) RTH1 (R1T)

Connector for control PCB Forced cooling operation [ON/OFF] button LED for HOME LEAVE operation (red) LED for timer (yellow) LED for operation (green) Room temperature thermistor

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Connector for float switch Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for fan motor Connector for signal receiver PCB (when the wireless remote controller is used) Connector for terminal board (for inter-unit wiring) Connector for terminal board (for wired remote controller) Connector for wiring adaptor PCB (option) Connector for group control adaptor (option) Connector for self-cleaning decoration panel (option) Connector for [A2P] LED for service monitor (green) Selector switch for emergency

[A2P] 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

X1A, X7A X2A X4A X8A X9A X10A HAP Connector for [A1P] Connector for sensor kit (option) Connector for humidity sensor PCB [A3P] Connector for self-cleaning decoration panel (option) Connector for swing motors Connector for drain pump motor LED for service monitor (green)

[A3P]: Humidity Sensor PCB 1) CN1

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

X9A X2A X4A X10A X8A X7A X1A HAP

[A3P]: Humidity Sensor PCB Humidity sensor

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

64 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for terminal board (for wired remote controller) Connector for transformer Connector for float switch Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for fan motor Connector for signal receiver PCB (when the wireless remote controller is used) Connector for drain pump motor Connector for terminal board (for inter-unit wiring) Connector for wiring adaptor PCB (option) Connector for group control adaptor (option) Connector for swing motor Connector for ON/OFF input from outside (option) Connector for interface adaptor (option) LED for service monitor (green) Selector switch for emergency

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.11 FHQ35/50/60BWV1B Connectors and Other Parts

66 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for terminal board (for wired remote controller) Connector for transformer Connector for limit switch (for swing flap) Connector for float switch (option) Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for fan motor Connector for signal receiver PCB (when the wireless remote controller is used) Connector for drain pump motor (option) Connector for terminal board (for inter-unit wiring) Connector for swing motor Connector for wring adaptor PCB (option) Connector for group control adaptor (option) Connector for ON/OFF input from outside (option) Connector for interface adaptor (option) LED for service monitor (green) Selector switch for emergency

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

2.12 FDBQ25B8V1 Connectors and Other Parts

[A1P]: Control PCB 1) X5A 2) X10A, X11A 3) X17A 4) X18A 5) X19A 6) X21A 7) X27A 8) X33A 9) X35A 10) X40A 11) X60A, X61A 12) HAP 13) SS1

68 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connector for terminal board (for wired remote controller) Connector for transformer Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for liquid pipe thermistor Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for fan motor Connector for terminal board (for inter-unit wiring) Connector for wiring adaptor PCB (option) Connector for group control adaptor (option) Connector for ON/OFF input from outside (option) Connector for interface adaptor (option) LED for service monitor (green) Selector switch for emergency

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Connector for float switch Connector for room temperature thermistor Connector for indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector for liquid pipe thermistor Connector for drain pump motor Connector for terminal board (for inter-unit wiring) Connector for power supply wiring (option) Connector for terminal board (for wired remote controller) Connector for wiring adaptor PCB (option) Connector for group control adaptor (option) Connector for fan PCB Connector for multi zoning (option) LED for service monitor (green) Selector switch for emergency

[A2P]: Fan PCB (for FBQ35/50C8VEB) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

X3A X6A X8A X10A F2U F4U HAP Connector for control PCB Connector for reactor Connector for fan motor Connector for terminal board (power supply) Fuse (5 A, 250 V) Fuse (6.3 A, 250 V) LED for service monitor (green)

[A2P]: Fan PCB (for FBQ60C8VEB) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

X1A, X2A X3A X6A X9A X10A F3U HAP Connector for fan motor Connector for control PCB Connector for reactor Connector for capacitor PCB Connector for terminal board (power supply) Fuse (6.3 A, 250 V) LED for service monitor (green)

[A3P]: Capacitor PCB (FBQ60C8VEB only)

Connector for X9A on fan PCB 3P217472-1

70 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

X85A X33A HAP X35A X27A Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Wired Remote Controller

3. Wired Remote Controller 3.1

Connectors and Other Parts

1) P1, P2 2) R1T 3) SS1

Terminal for indoor unit Room temperature thermistor MAIN / SUB setting switch ∗ Refer to page 422 for detail.

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Wired Remote Controller

Connectors and Other Parts

Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram

Drain Pump Control99 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller101 Freeze Prevention Control 103 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)104

3. Function of Thermistor 105 4. Control Specification 107 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13

Mode Hierarchy 107 Frequency Control108 Controls at Mode Changing / Start-up111 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control112 Input Current Control113 Freeze-up Protection Control 113 Heating Peak-cut Control 114 Outdoor Fan Control115 Liquid Compression Protection Function115 Defrost Control 116 Low Hz High Pressure Limit 117 Outdoor Electronic Expansion Valve Control 117 Malfunctions 122

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1. Indoor Unit Control (RA Models) 1.1

Definitions of Temperatures

The definitions of temperatures are classified as following. Room temperature: temperature of lower part of the room Set temperature: temperature set by remote controller Room thermistor temperature: temperature detected by room temperature thermistor Target temperature: temperature determined by microcomputer

Room thermistor temperature

Set temperature Room temperature

The illustration is for wall mounted type as representative.

The temperature of the room is detected by the room temperature thermistor. However, there is a difference between the “temperature detected by room temperature thermistor” and the “temperature of lower part of the room”, depending on the type of the indoor unit or installation condition. Practically, the temperature control is done by the “target temperature appropriately adjusted for the indoor unit” and the “temperature detected by room temperature thermistor”.

Main Control Parameters

The frequency of the compressor is controlled by the following 2 parameters: The load condition of the operating indoor unit The difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature

Additional Control Parameters

The target frequency is adapted by additional parameters in the following cases: Frequency restrictions Initial settings Forced cooling operation

To regulate the capacity, a frequency control is needed. The inverter makes it possible to alter the rotation speed of the compressor. The following table explains the conversion principle: Phase

The supplied AC power source is converted into the DC power source for the present. The DC power source is reconverted into the three phase AC power source with variable frequency. When the frequency increases, the rotation speed of the compressor increases resulting in an increased refrigerant circulation. This leads to a higher amount of the heat exchange per unit. When the frequency decreases, the rotation speed of the compressor decreases resulting in a decreased refrigerant circulation. This leads to a lower amount of the heat exchange per unit.

76 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

The following drawing shows a schematic view of the inverter principle: Refrigerant circulation rate (high)

Amount of heat exchanged air (small)

Amount of heat exchanged air (large)

high f low f low speed

50 Hz freq= constant 60 Hz freq=variable

Amount of heat exchanged air (large) Amount of heat exchanged air (small)

Refrigerant circulation rate (low)

The inverter provides the following features: The regulating capacity can be changed according to the changes in the outdoor temperature and cooling / heating load. Quick heating and quick cooling The compressor rotational speed is increased when starting the heating (or cooling). This enables to reach the set temperature quickly. Even during extreme cold weather, high capacity is achieved. It is maintained even when the outdoor temperature is 2°C. Comfortable air conditioning A fine adjustment is integrated to keep the room temperature constant. Energy saving heating and cooling Once the set temperature is reached, the energy saving operation enables to maintain the room temperature at low power.

The following functions regulate the minimum and maximum frequency: Frequency Low High

Functions Four way valve operation compensation. Refer to page 111. Compressor protection function. Refer to page 112. Discharge pipe temperature control. Refer to page 112. Input current control. Refer to page 113. Freeze-up protection control. Refer to page 113. Heating peak-cut control. Refer to page 114. Defrost control. Refer to page 116.

Refer to page 405 for detail.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Operation Starting Control

Wall Mounted Type: FTXG Series The system carries out the following control at the beginning to conduct every functional parts properly. 1. Opening the front panel fully 2. Output of the ∆D signal after the front panel starts moving 3. Opening the flap fully after the front panel opens fully 4. Making the fan rotate when the flap passes over the fan-banned area

(1) Opening the front panel fully

(3) Opening the flap fully

(2) Output of the ∆D signal after the front panel starts moving

(4) Making the fan rotate when the flap passes over the fan-banned area

OFF Operation starting control

ON Fully close Front panel Fully open

: Actual position of panel or flap : Additional control of motor

Under running control

Under operation mode control

OFF Output Under operation mode control

Force supply (from the outdoor unit)

ON The outdoor unit provides force when it receives the ∆D signal. OFF

78 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Airflow Direction Control

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

The large flap sends a large volume of air downward to the floor. The flap provides an optimum control in cooling, dry, and heating operation. <Cooling / Dry> During cooling or dry operation, the flap retracts into the indoor unit. Then, cool air can be blown far and distributed all over the room. <Heating> During heating operation, the large flap directs airflow downward to spread the warm air to the entire room.

The louvers, made of elastic synthetic resin, provide a wide range of airflow that guarantees comfortable air distribution.

The following table explains the auto-swing process for cooling, dry, heating, and fan: Wall Mounted Type Vertical Swing (up and down) Series

Horizontal Swing (right and left)

Floor Standing Type: FVXG Series The swinging range of the flap is the same in any operation mode. ˚

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Floor Standing Type: FVXS Series Vertical Swing (up and down)

Upward airflow limit

Upward airflow limit ON

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type Vertical Swing (up and down) Cooling / Dry / Fan

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-J/G Series Alternative repetition of vertical and horizontal swing motions enables uniform air-conditioning of the entire room. This function is effective for starting the air conditioner. When the horizontal swing and vertical swing are both set to automatic operation, the airflow becomes 3-D airflow. The horizontal and vertical swing motion is altered and the airflow direction changes in the order shown in the following diagram. (1): The vertical blades (louvers) move from the right to the left. (2): The horizontal blades (flaps) move downward. (3): The vertical blades (louvers) move from the left to the right. (4): The horizontal blades (flaps) move upward. (2)

Function and Control

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Wall Mounted Type The vertical swing flap is controlled not to blow the air directly at the people in the room. Cooling / Dry

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Fan Speed Control for Indoor Unit

Phase control and fan speed control contains 9 steps: LLL, LL, SL, L, ML, M, MH, H, and HH. The airflow rate can be automatically controlled depending on the difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature. This is done through phase control and Hall IC control. For more information about Hall IC, refer to the troubleshooting for fan motor on page 274, 277.

Automatic Fan Speed Control

In automatic fan speed operation, the step “SL” is not available. Wall Mounted Type Floor Standing Type Step

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type Duct Connected Type

LLL LL L ML M MH H HH (POWERFUL)

= The airflow rate is automatically controlled within this range when the [FAN] setting button is set to automatic. <Cooling> The following drawing explains the principle of fan speed control for cooling. Wall Mounted Type, Floor Standing Type Room thermistor temperature – target temperature Fan speed

*The upper limit is M tap in 30 minutes from the operation start. Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type, Duct Connected Type Fan speed

Room thermistor temperature – target temperature M

<Heating> In heating operation, the fan speed is regulated according to the indoor heat exchanger temperature and the difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature. Note:

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

1. During POWERFUL operation, the fan rotates at H tap + 40 ~ 90 rpm. 2. The fan stops during defrost operation. Wall Mounted Type The fan speed is controlled automatically. The latest command has the priority between POWERFUL and COMFORT AIRFLOW.

82 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Floor Standing Type: FVXG Series The RADIANT operation has 2 operation modes. RADIANT 1: RADIANT operation with heating RADIANT 2: RADIANT operation only

1.6.1 Indoor Electronic Expansion Valve (Motor Operated Valve) Control Initializing with

Power ON The indoor electronic expansion valve is initialized when turning on the power.

Opening Limit Control

Opening limit control limits the opening of the indoor electronic expansion valve in order to keep a specified range during RADIANT operation.

Starting Operation Control

Starting operation control opens the indoor electronic expansion valve to a certain degree when starting RADIANT operation. The indoor electronic expansion valve is kept open for a certain period.

Target Panel Temperature Control

When the starting operation control finishes, the target panel temperature control starts and adjusts the opening of the indoor electronic expansion valve to achieve the target panel temperature. The panel temperature is categorized into stop, dropping, keep, up, and return zones. (The target panel temperature is 55°C at maximum but it may be lower depending on the condition.) Radiant panel temperature Stop zone 70˚C Dropping zone 55˚C Keep zone 53˚C Up zone 51˚C 45˚C Up zone / return zone from stop (R14636)

Operation Stop Control

Operation stops, the radiant panel temperature control is carried out.

Dropping zone Keep zone

The opening of indoor electronic expansion valve decreases. The opening of indoor electronic expansion valve is kept.

The opening of indoor electronic expansion valve increases. Starting operation control is carried out.

In case operation stops during RADIANT operation (including thermostat off) In case any of the following events occur while the indoor electronic expansion valve is open, the operation stop control makes the indoor electronic expansion valve close completely. Operation ON → OFF RADIANT 1 or RADIANT 2 is canceled. Thermostat off Defrost control

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.6.2 Indoor Unit Fan Control The movement of the indoor unit fan is different whether in RADIANT 1 or RADIANT 2. RADIANT 1 starts.

Room temperature Set temperature

Note: The only difference between RADIANT 1 and RADIANT 2 is the movement of the indoor unit fan. In RADIANT 1, the rotation speed of the indoor unit fan is controlled depending on the difference between the set temperature and the room temperature. In RADIANT 2, the rotation speed of the indoor unit fan is constant.

Room temperature Rotation speed of indoor unit fan

1.6.3 RADIANT Operation and Optional Function Some optional function cannot be used with RADIANT 1 or RADIANT 2 at the same time. Function

POWERFUL operation ECONO operation

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Program Dry Operation

Program dry operation removes humidity while preventing the room temperature from lowering. Since the microcomputer controls both the temperature and airflow rate, the temperature adjustment and [FAN] setting buttons are inoperable.

The microcomputer automatically sets the temperature and airflow rate. The difference between the room thermistor temperature at start-up and the target temperature is divided into two zones. Then, the unit operates an appropriate capacity for each zone to maintain the temperature and humidity at a comfortable level. Room thermistor temperature at start-up

24°C or more Room thermistor temperature at start-up

+0.5˚C Zone A = Thermostat OFF

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Automatic Operation Automatic Cooling / Heating Function When the automatic operation is selected with the remote controller, the microcomputer automatically determines the operation mode as cooling or heating according to the room temperature and the set temperature at start-up. The unit automatically switches the operation mode to maintain the room temperature at the set temperature. Ts: set temperature (set by remote controller) Tt: target temperature (determined by microcomputer) Tr: room thermistor temperature (detected by room temperature thermistor) C: correction value 1. The set temperature (Ts) determines the target temperature (Tt). (Ts = 18 ~ 30°C). 2. The target temperature (Tt) is calculated as; Tt = Ts + C where C is the correction value. C = 0°C 3. Thermostat ON/OFF point and operation mode switching point are as follows. Tr means the room thermistor temperature. (1) Heating → Cooling switching point: Tr ≥ Tt + 3.0°C (FTXG, FTXS-G, FVXG series) Tr ≥ Tt + 2.5°C (other models) (2) Cooling → Heating switching point: Tr < Tt – 2.5°C (3) Thermostat ON/OFF point is the same as the ON/OFF point of cooling or heating operation. 4. During initial operation Tr ≥ Ts: Cooling operation Tr < Ts: Heating operation FTXG, FTXS-G, FVXG series Cooling Operation

Target temperature + 3.0˚C Target temperature + 2.0˚C

= Thermostat OFF Target temperature – 2.0˚C = Thermostat OFF Target temperature – 2.5˚C Heating Operation

Ex: When the target temperature is 25°C Cooling → 23°C: Thermostat OFF → 22°C: Switch to heating Heating → 27°C: Thermostat OFF → 28°C: Switch to cooling Other Models Cooling Operation Target temperature + 2.5˚C Target temperature + 1.5˚C

= Thermostat OFF Target temperature – 2.0˚C = Thermostat OFF Target temperature – 2.5˚C Heating Operation

Ex: When the target temperature is 25°C Cooling → 23°C: Thermostat OFF → 22°C: Switch to heating Heating → 26.5°C: Thermostat OFF → 27.5°C: Switch to cooling

86 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

Thermostat Control Thermostat control is based on the difference between the room thermistor temperature and the target temperature. Thermostat OFF Condition The temperature difference is in the zone A. Thermostat ON Condition The temperature difference returns to the zone C after being in the zone A. The system resumes from defrost control in any zones except A. The operation turns on in any zones except A. The monitoring time has passed while the temperature difference is in the zone B. (Cooling / Dry : 10 minutes, Heating / Radiant : 10 seconds) <Cooling / Dry> Wall Mounted Type, Floor Standing Type

ON Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

Cooling : –0.5˚C Dry : –0.5˚C C

–1.5˚C B Cooling : –2.0˚C Dry : –2.5 ~ –2.0˚C A OFF

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type, Duct Connected Type

ON Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

Cooling : –1.0˚C C Dry : –1.0˚C B Cooling : –2.0˚C A Dry : –2.5 ~ –2.0˚C

–1.5˚C OFF Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

<Heating / Radiant> Wall Mounted Type: FTXG, FTXS-G series Floor Standing Type: FVXG series Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-K, CTXS-K, FTXS-J series Floor Standing Type: FVXS series Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

1.5˚C B 1.0˚C C 0˚C ON

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type, Duct Connected Type Room thermistor temperature – target temperature

1.5˚C B 1.0˚C C 0.5˚C ON

Refer to “Temperature Control” on page 76 for detail.

88 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.10 NIGHT SET Mode Outline

When the OFF TIMER is set, the NIGHT SET Mode is automatically activated. The NIGHT SET Mode keeps the airflow rate setting.

The NIGHT SET Mode continues operation at the target temperature for the first one hour, then automatically raises the target temperature slightly in the case of cooling, or lowers it slightly in the case of heating. This prevents excessive cooling in summer and excessive heating in winter to ensure comfortable sleeping conditions, and also conserves electricity. <Cooling> Ex: Wall Mounted Type, Floor Standing Type

0.5˚C Target temperature

Operation stops at the set hours

1 hour TIMER operation NIGHT SET Circuit ON

2˚C TIMER operation NIGHT SET Mode ON

1 hour later (R10871)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.11 ECONO Operation Wall Mounted Type, Floor Standing Type The "ECONO operation" reduces the maximum operating current and the power consumption. This operation is particularly convenient for energy-saving-oriented users. It is also a major bonus for those whose breaker capacities do not allow the use of multiple electrical devices and air conditioners. It is easily activated from the wireless remote controller by pushing the [ECONO] button. When this function is activated, the maximum capacity also decreases. ECONO operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller cancels the function. ECONO operation is available when the unit is in AUTO, COOL, DRY, or HEAT operation and not available in RADIANT or FAN operation. ECONO operation and POWERFUL operation cannot be used at the same time. The latest command has the priority.

Maximum during normal operation Power consumption and current

Normal Maximum during ECONO operation

ECONO Operation Time (R9288)

90 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.12 HOME LEAVE Operation Outline

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type, Duct Connected Type HOME LEAVE operation is a function that allows you to record your favorite set temperature and airflow rate. You can start your favorite operation mode simply by pressing the [HOME LEAVE] button on the remote controller.

1. Start of Function The function starts when the [HOME LEAVE] button is pressed in cooling mode, heating mode (including POWERFUL operation), or while the operation is stopped. If this button is pressed in POWERFUL operation, the POWERFUL operation is canceled and this function becomes effective. The [HOME LEAVE] button is ineffective in dry mode and fan mode. 2. Details of Function A mark representing HOME LEAVE is indicated on the display of the remote controller. The indoor unit is operated according to the set temperature and airflow rate for HOME LEAVE which were pre-set in the memory of the remote controller. The LED (red) of indoor unit representing HOME LEAVE lights up. (It goes out when the operation is stopped.) 3. End of Function The function ends when the [HOME LEAVE] button is pressed again during HOME LEAVE operation or when the [POWERFUL] button is pressed.

“HOME LEAVE operation” set temp. Set temp.

HOME LEAVE operation Normal operation

Normal operation Time

Set temp. “HOME LEAVE operation” set temp.

HOME LEAVE operation Normal operation

Normal operation Time

The set temperature and airflow rate are memorized in the remote controller. When the remote controller is reset due to replacement of battery, it is necessary to set the temperature and airflow rate again for HOME LEAVE operation.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.13 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation Outline

Wall Mounted Type: FTXG, FTXS-K, CTXS-K, FTXS-G Series This function detects the existence of humans in the room with a human motion sensor (INTELLIGENT EYE) and reduces the capacity when there is nobody in the room in order to save electricity.

1. Detection method by INTELLIGENT EYE

If the sensor detects the outputs 10 times/sec. or more, it judges humans exist. 1 sec.

(Human motion) Human detection ON signal OFF

The sensor detects human motion by receiving infrared rays and displays the pulse wave output. A microcomputer in an indoor unit carries out a sampling every 20 msec. and if it detects 10 cycles of the wave in 1 second in total (corresponding to 20 msec. × 10 = 200 msec.), it judges humans are in the room as the motion signal is ON. 2. The motions (for example: in cooling) within 20 min. Human detection signal

When the microcomputer does not have a signal from the sensor in 20 minutes, it judges that nobody is in the room and operates the unit at a temperature shifted from the target temperature. (Cooling / Dry : 1 ~ 2°C higher, Heating : 2°C lower, Auto : according to the operation mode at that time.) In FAN operation, the fan speed is reduced by 60 rpm.

For dry operation, you cannot set the temperature with a remote controller, but the target temperature is shifted internally.

92 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.14 2-Area INTELLIGENT EYE Operation Outline

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-J Series The following functions can be performed by a motion sensor (INTELLIGENT EYE). 1. Reduction of the capacity when there is nobody in the room in order to save electricity (energy saving operation) 2. Dividing the room into plural areas and detecting existence of humans in each area. Moving the airflow direction to the area with no human automatically to avoid direct airflow on humans.

If the sensor detects the outputs 10 times/sec. or more, it judges humans exist.

High Low (Condition of 10 times or more output)

Detection signal ON from the sensor OFF (Human motion)

Human detection ON signal

OFF If the detection signal (ON) continues 3 sec. or more, it judges humans exist. (R12757)

This sensor detects human motion by receiving infrared rays and displays the pulse wave output. The microcomputer in the indoor unit carries out a sampling every 20 msec. and if it detects 10 cycles of the wave in one second in total (corresponding to 20 msec.× 10 = 200 msec.), and when the ON signal continues 3 sec., it judges human is in the room as the motion signal is ON 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE sensor is divided into 2 areas and detects humans in each area.

Image of 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE Wall Top view Indoor unit

· A microcomputer judges human existence by the sensor signal from each area A and B. (R12276)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

2. Motions (for example: in cooling) within 20 minutes Human detection signal

When the microcomputer does not have a signal from the sensor in 20 minutes, it judges that nobody is in the room and operates the unit in temperature shifted from the target temperature. (Cooling / Dry : 2°C higher, Heating : 2°C lower, Auto : according to the operation mode at that time.) In case of FAN operation, the fan speed reduces by 60 rpm. 3. Airflow direction in 2-area INTELLIGENT EYE operation Detection method: The opposite area of detected area is set as the target direction.

Detection signal ON in both area A and B: Shift the airflow direction to area B (left side) Detection signal ON in area A: Shift the airflow direction to area B (left side) Detection signal ON in area B: Shift the airflow direction to area A (right side) Detection signal OFF in both area A and B: No change

* When the detection signal is OFF for 20 minutes in both area A and B, the unit starts energy saving operation.

For dry operation, you cannot set the temperature with remote controller, but internally the target temperature is shifted.

94 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.15 Inverter POWERFUL Operation Outline

In order to exploit the cooling and heating capacity to full extent, operate the air conditioner by increasing the indoor fan rotating speed and the compressor frequency.

When the [POWERFUL] button is pressed, the fan speed and target temperature are converted to the following states for 20 minutes. Operation mode COOL DRY HEAT / RADIANT 1

FAN AUTO Fan speed H tap + A rpm

18°C Dry rotating speed + A rpm H tap + A rpm

Lowered by 2 ~ 2.5°C

30 ~ 32°C H tap + A rpm Same as cooling / heating in POWERFUL operation

— The target temperature is kept unchanged.

A = 40 ~ 90 rpm (depending on the model)

Ex: POWERFUL operation in cooling Target temp.

It should be the lower limit of cooling temperature.

18˚C It counts 20 minutes. also in the remote controller.

POWERFUL ON POWERFUL OFF Fan

Ending condition: "or" in 1 to 3 1. After the lapse of 20 minutes. 2. Operation OFF 3. POWERFUL operation is OFF.

For Floor Standing Type: FVXG Series POWERFUL operation is only available in RADIANT 1 (RADIANT operation with heating), it is not available in RADIANT 2 (RADIANT operation only).

1.16 Multi-Colored Indicator Lamp / TIMER Lamp Features

Wall Mounted Type: FTXG Series Current operation mode is displayed in color of the lamp of the indoor unit. Operating status can be monitored even in automatic operation in accordance with the actual operation mode. Multi-colored indicator lamp / TIMER lamp

The lamp color changes according to the operation. ∗ AUTO Red / Blue ∗ DRY Green ∗ COOL Blue ∗ HEAT Red ∗ FAN White ∗ TIMER Orange

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

The brightness of the multi-colored indicator lamp can be adjusted L (low), H (high), or OFF. 1. Press the center of the [Temp] button and the [Mode] button at the same time.

5C is displayed on the LCD.

2. Select L (light) with the [Temp]

3. Press the [Mode] button to enter the brightness setting mode. 4. Press the [Temp] or button to adjust the brightness of the multi-colored indicator lamp.

5. Press the [Mode] button for 5 seconds to exit from the brightness setting mode. (When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode also.)

96 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.17 Other Functions 1.17.1 Hot-Start Function In order to prevent the cold air blast that normally comes when heating operation is started, the temperature of the indoor heat exchanger is detected, and the airflow is either stopped or made very weak thereby carrying out comfortable heating of the room. ∗ The cold air blast is also prevented using similar control when the defrosting operation is started or when the thermostat is turned ON.

1.17.2 Signal Receiving Sign When the indoor unit receives a signal from the remote controller, the unit emits a signal receiving sound.

1.17.3 Indoor Unit [ON/OFF] Button An [ON/OFF] button is provided on the display of the unit. Press the [ON/OFF] button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. The [ON/OFF] button is useful when the remote controller is missing or the battery has run out. The operation mode refers to the following table. Cooling Only Heat Pump

In the case of multi system operation, there are times when the unit does not activate with the [ON/OFF] button. Ex: Wall mounted type FTXS-J series

[ON/OFF] button (R8302)

When the [ON/OFF] button is pressed for 10 seconds or more, the forced operation is stopped.

1.17.4 Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter This filter combines the Air-Purifying Filter and Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter as a single highly effective filter. The filter traps microscopic particles, decomposes odors and even deactivates bacteria and viruses. It lasts for 3 years without replacement if washed about once every 6 months.

1.17.5 Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter The photocatalytic deodorizing filter powerfully decomposes odor of tobacco, pet, etc. The deodorizing power is regenerated simply by being exposed to the sunshine. It is recommended to dry the filter in the sun for about 6 hours (after vacuuming the filter) every 6 months.

1.17.6 Air-Purifying Filter The air-purifying filter collects tobacco smoke, pollen, etc. with electrostatic agency. This filter includes a deodorizing active carbon filter that removes minute particles of odor. Replace the air-purifying filter every 3 months.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (RA Models)

1.17.7 Auto-restart Function If a power failure (including one for just a moment) occurs during the operation, the operation restarts automatically when the power is restored in the same condition as before the power failure. Note:

It takes 3 minutes to restart the operation because the 3-minute standby function is activated.

1.17.8 WEEKLY TIMER Operation Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week (up to 28 settings in total). Those 3 items of “ON/OFF”, “temperature” and “time” can be set. Refer to “WEEKLY TIMER Operation” on page 167, 208 for detail.

1.17.9 Brightness Setting of the Indoor Unit Display Floor Standing Type: FVXG Series Each time you press the [Brightness] button on the remote controller, the brightness of the indoor unit display changes to “high”, “low”, or “off”. Refer to the operation manual for details.

Timer lamp (yellow) Operation lamp (green) Radiant lamp (red) (R14639)

98 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

2. Indoor Unit Control (SA Models) 2.1

2.1.1 When the Float Switch is Tripped While the Cooling Thermostat is ON: The remote controller displays A3 and the indoor unit stops.

∗1. (Normal operation): The purpose of residual operation is to completely drain any moisture adhering to the fin of the indoor heat exchanger when the thermostat goes off during cooling operation. ∗2. (Malfunction residual): The remote controller displays A3 and the air conditioner comes to an abnormal stop in 5 minutes if the float switch is turned OFF while the cooling thermostat is ON.

2.1.2 When the Float Switch is Tripped While the Cooling Thermostat is OFF: The indoor unit enters malfunction treatment if the float switch is not reset within 5 minutes. Thermostat (running)

The remote controller displays A3 and the indoor unit stops.

∗3. (Malfunction residual): The remote controller displays A3 and the air conditioner comes to an abnormal stop if the float switch is turned OFF and not turned ON again within 5 minutes while the cooling thermostat is OFF.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

2.1.3 When the Float Switch is Tripped During Heating Operation: Thermostat (running)

ON The remote controller displays A3 and the indoor unit stops.

During heating operation, if the float switch is not reset even after the 5 minutes operation, 5 seconds stop, 5 minutes operation cycle ends, operation continues until the switch is reset.

2.1.4 When the Float Switch is Tripped and AF is Displayed on the Remote Controller: The indoor unit enters malfunction treatment if the float switch is not reset within 5 minutes. ON Remote controller display OFF Float switch

The remote controller displays A3 and the indoor unit stops.

AF display (running)

1st time 2nd time 3rd time 4th time 5th time

∗4. (Malfunction residual): If the float switch is tripped 5 times in succession, a drain malfunction is determined to have occurred. AF is then displayed as operation continues. ∗5. (Malfunction residual): The remote controller displays A3 and the air conditioner comes to an abnormal stop if the float switch is OFF for more than 5 minutes in the case of ∗4.

100 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller Temperature is controlled by both the thermostat sensor in remote controller and air suction thermostat in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the thermostat sensor in remote controller is set to “Use.” )

If there is a significant difference in the set temperature and the suction temperature, fine adjustment control is carried out using a body thermostat sensor, or using the sensor in the remote controller near the position of the user when the suction temperature is near the set temperature. ˚C 32

Set temperature (Ts)

Suction temperature (TH1)

Range in which thermostat sensor in remote controller can be used

Range in which body thermostat sensor can be used

Differential (R17288)

Assuming the set temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction temperature has changed from 18°C to 30°C (A → F): (This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, and the suction temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.) Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 23°C (A → C). Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 27°C (C → E). Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 27°C to 30°C (E → F). Assuming suction temperature has changed from 30°C to 18°C (F → A): Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 30°C to 25°C (F → D). Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 21°C (D → B). Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 21°C to 18°C (B → A).

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

When heating, the hot air rises to the top of the room, resulting in the temperature being lower near the floor where the occupants are. When controlling by body thermostat sensor only, the indoor unit may therefore be turned off by the thermostat before the lower part of the room reaches the set temperature. The temperature can be controlled so the lower part of the room where the occupants are does not become cold by widening the range in which thermostat sensor in remote controller can be used so that suction temperature is higher than the set temperature. ˚C 32

Set temperature (Ts) 30

TH1 = Ts + 1 ≤ 31˚C 20

TH1 = Ts + 12 ≤ 33˚C

TH1 = Ts + 10 ≤ 31˚C 16

Suction temperature (TH1) Range in which thermostat sensor in remote controller can be used

Range in which body thermostat sensor can be used

Differential (R17289)

Assuming the set temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction temperature has changed from 18°C to 28°C (A → D): (This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, and the suction temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.) Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 25°C (A → C). Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 28°C (C → D). Assuming suction temperature has changed from 28°C to 18°C (D → A): Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 28°C to 23°C (D → B). Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 18°C (B → A).

102 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

Freeze Prevention Control When the temperature detected by liquid pipe thermistor (R2T) of the indoor heat exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze prevention control in accordance with the following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below. Conditions for starting: Temperature is –1°C or less for total of 40 min., or temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min. Conditions for cancelling: Temperature is +7°C or more for 10 min. continuously Ex: Case where temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min.

Forced OFF by thermostat (R12940)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit Control (SA Models)

Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only) At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating operation, the indoor unit fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.

or Thermostat ON Hot start control

· Tc > 52˚C Hot start in progress Normal operation

H/L remote controller setting

OFF Remote controller setting

The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF Normal operation

Level position (R15421)

TH2: Temperature (°C) detected with the gas thermistor TC : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature

104 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Function of Thermistor

3. Function of Thermistor Illustrations are for 4-room models as representative and have 4 lines of indoor unit system (A ~ D). 3-room models have 3 lines (A ~ C) and 5-room models have 5 lines (A ~ E). Cooling Only Model Outdoor electronic expansion valve

EVA EVB EVC EVD D C B A

Heat Pump Model Outdoor electronic expansion valve

A: In case of FVXG model

EVA EVB EVC EVD D C B Indoor electronic expansion valve (Motor operated valve)

(1) Outdoor Heat Exchanger Thermistor

1. The outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for controlling the target discharge pipe temperature. The system sets the target discharge pipe temperature according to the outdoor and indoor heat exchanger temperature, and controls the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening so that the target discharge pipe temperature can be obtained. 2. In cooling operation, the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for detecting the disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor. When the discharge pipe temperature becomes lower than the outdoor heat exchanger temperature, the discharge pipe thermistor is judged as disconnected. 3. In cooling operation, the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for high pressure protection.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function of Thermistor

(2) Discharge Pipe Thermistor

1. The discharge pipe thermistor is used for controlling discharge pipe temperature. If the discharge pipe temperature (used in place of the inner temperature of the compressor) rises abnormally, the operating frequency becomes lower or the operation halts. 2. The discharge pipe thermistor is used for detecting disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor.

(3) Gas Pipe Thermistor

1. In cooling operation, the gas pipe thermistor is used for gas pipe isothermal control. The system controls outdoor electronic expansion valve opening so that the gas pipe temperature in each room becomes equal.

(4) Indoor Heat Exchanger Thermistor

1. The indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for controlling the target discharge pipe temperature. The system sets the target discharge pipe temperature according to the outdoor and indoor heat exchanger temperature, and controls the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening so that the target discharge pipe temperature can be obtained. 2. In cooling operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for freeze-up protection control. If the indoor heat exchanger temperature drops abnormally, the operating frequency becomes lower or the operation halts. 3. In cooling operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for anti-icing function. If any of the following conditions are met in the room where operation halts, it is assumed as icing. The conditions are Tc ≤ – 1° C Ta – Tc ≥ 10° C where Ta is the room temperature and Tc is the indoor heat exchanger temperature. 4. In heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for heating peak-cut control. If the indoor heat exchanger temperature rises abnormally, the operating frequency becomes lower or the operation halts. 5. In heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for detecting the disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor. When the discharge pipe temperature becomes lower than the maximum indoor heat exchanger temperature, the discharge pipe thermistor is judged as disconnected. 6. When only one indoor unit is operating, the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for subcooling control. The actual subcool is calculated with the liquid pipe temperature and the indoor heat exchanger temperature. The system controls the outdoor electronic expansion valve openings to obtain the target subcool. 7. The indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for wiring error check function. The refrigerant flows in order from the port A to detect the indoor heat exchanger temperature one by one, and then wiring and piping can be checked.

(5) Liquid Pipe Thermistor

1. When only one indoor unit is in heating, the liquid pipe thermistor is used for subcooling control. The actual subcool is calculated with the liquid pipe temperature and the maximum indoor heat exchanger temperature. The system controls the outdoor electronic expansion valve openings to obtain the target subcool. 2. In heating operation, the liquid pipe thermistor is used for liquid pipes isothermal control. The system controls the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening so that the liquid pipe temperatures in each room becomes equal.

(6) Radiant Panel Thermistors

1. The radiant panel thermistors are used for calculating radiant panel surface temperature. Due to structural and manufactural restrictions, the radiant panel surface temperature cannot be controlled directly with a thermistor. Thermistors are mounted on the radiant panel piping in order to calculate the radiant panel surface temperature. The indoor electronic expansion valve is controlled according to the radiant panel surface temperature. 2. The radiant panel thermistors are used for detecting malfunction of the indoor electronic expansion valve.

106 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

There are 3 modes; normal operation mode, forced operation mode, and power transistor test mode for installation and servicing.

Cooling Only Model Air conditioner control mode Forced operation mode Forced cooling operation Power transistor test mode Normal operation mode Fan Cooling (includes drying) Stop (indoor unit: OFF) Preheating operation Discharging from capacitor Stop (R14428)

Heat Pump Model Air conditioner control mode Forced operation mode Forced cooling operation Power transistor test mode Normal operation mode Fan Cooling (includes drying) Heating Heating Defrosting Stop (indoor unit: OFF) Preheating operation Discharging from capacitor Stop (R14248)

Unless specified otherwise, a dry operation command is regarded as cooling operation and a radiant operation command is regarded as heating operation. Indoor fan operation cannot be made in multiple indoor units. (A forced fan command is made during forced cooling operation.) Determine Operation Mode The system judges the operation mode command which is set by each room in accordance with the procedure, and determines the operation mode of the system. The following procedure is taken when the modes conflict with each other. ∗1. The system follows the mode which is set first. (First-push, first-set) ∗2. For the rooms where the different mode is set, standby mode is activated. (The operation lamp blinks.)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Frequency Control Frequency that corresponds to each room’s capacity is determined according to the difference between the target temperature and the temperature of each room. The function is explained as follows. 1. How to determine frequency 2. Frequency command from an indoor unit (Difference between a room thermistor temperature and the target temperature) 3. Frequency command from an indoor unit (The ranked capacity of the operating room) 4. Frequency initial setting 5. PI control When the shift of the frequency is less than zero (∆F<0) by PI control, the target frequency is used as the command frequency.

Dropping function Input current control, etc. Upper limit frequency FMAX Command frequency

Initial frequency PI control Defrost control (∗)

Lower limit frequency

FMIN Upper limit function Compressor protection function Skip control

Lower limit function Four way valve operating compensation (∗), etc. (∗): only for heat pump models (R16055)

How to Determine Frequency The compressor’s frequency is determined by taking the following steps. For Cooling Only Model 1. Determine command frequency Command frequency is determined in the following order of priority. 1. Forced cooling 2. Indoor frequency command 2. Determine upper limit frequency The minimum value is set as the upper limit frequency among the frequency upper limits of the following functions: Compressor protection, input current, discharge pipe temperature, low Hz high pressure limit, freeze-up protection. 3. Determine lower limit frequency The maximum value is set as lower limit frequency among the frequency lower limits of the following functions: Draft prevention, pressure difference upkeep. 4. Determine prohibited frequency There is a certain prohibited frequency such as a power supply frequency.

108 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Control Specification

For Heat Pump Model 1. Determine command frequency Command frequency is determined in the following order of priority. 1. Limiting defrost control time 2. Forced cooling / heating 3. Indoor frequency command 2. Determine upper limit frequency The minimum value is set as upper limit frequency among the frequency upper limits of the following functions: Compressor protection, input current, discharge pipe temperature, low Hz high pressure limit, heating peak-cut, freeze-up protection, defrost. 3. Determine lower limit frequency The maximum value is set as the lower limit frequency among the frequency lower limits of the following functions: Four way valve operation compensation, draft prevention, pressure difference upkeep. 4. Determine prohibited frequency There is a certain prohibited frequency such as a power supply frequency. Indoor Frequency Command (∆D signal) The difference between a room thermistor temperature and the target temperature is taken as the “∆D signal” and is used for frequency command. Temperature difference (°C) –2.0

F Values depend on the type of indoor unit. ∗Th OFF = Thermostat OFF Indoor Unit Capacity (S value) The capacity of the indoor unit is a “S” value and is used for frequency command. Ex:

Frequency Initial Setting <Outline> When starting the compressor, or when conditions are varied due to the change of the operating room, the frequency must be initialized according to the total of a maximum ∆D value of each room and a total value of Q (ΣQ) of the operating room (the room in which the thermos is set to ON). Q value: Indoor unit output determined from indoor unit volume, airflow rate and other factors.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control Specification

PI Control (Determine Frequency Up / Down by ∆D Signal) 1. P control A total of the ∆D value is calculated in each sampling time (20 seconds), and the frequency is adjusted according to its difference from the frequency previously calculated. 2. I control If the operating frequency is not change more than a certain fixed time, the frequency is adjusted according to the Σ∆D value. When the Σ∆D value is low, the frequency is lowered. When the Σ∆D value is high, the frequency is increased. 3. Limit of frequency increasing range When the difference between input current and input current dropping value is less than 1.5 A, the frequency increasing range must be limited. 4. Frequency management when other controls are functioning When each frequency is dropping; Frequency management is carried out only when the frequency drops. For limiting lower limit Frequency management is carried out only when the frequency rises. 5. Upper and lower limit of frequency by PI control The frequency upper and lower limits are set according to the total of S values. When the indoor unit quiet operation commands come from more than one room or when the outdoor unit quiet operation commands come from all the rooms, the upper limit frequency is lower than the usual setting.

110 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Control Specification

Controls at Mode Changing / Start-up

4.3.1 Preheating Operation Outline

The inverter operation in open phase starts with the conditions of the preheating command from the outdoor unit.

ON Condition When the outdoor temperature is below 10.5°C, the inverter operation in open phase starts. OFF Condition When the outdoor temperature is higher than 12°C, the inverter operation in open phase stops.

4.3.2 Four Way Valve Switching Outline

In heating operation, current is conducted, and in cooling and defrosting operation, current is not conducted. In order to eliminate the switching sound, as the four way valve coil switches from ON to OFF when the heating is stopped, the OFF delay switch of the four way valve is carried out.

OFF delay switch of four way valve: The four way valve coil is energized for 150 seconds after the operation is stopped.

4.3.3 Four Way Valve Operation Compensation Outline

At the beginning of the operation as the four way valve is switched, the pressure difference to activate the four way valve is acquired by having output frequency which is more than a certain fixed frequency, for a certain fixed time.

Starting Conditions 1. When starting the compressor for heating 2. When the operation mode changes from the previous time 3. When starting the compressor for defrosting 4. When starting the compressor for the first time after resetting with the power ON. The lower limit of frequency keeps A Hz for 70 seconds with any conditions 1 through 4 above. A (Hz) 40/50/52/58 class

4.3.4 3-Minute Standby Turning on the compressor is prohibited for 3 minutes after turning off. (Except when defrosting.)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control Specification

4.3.5 Compressor Protection Function When turning the compressor from OFF to ON, the upper limit of frequency is set as follows. (The function is not used when defrosting.) (Hz) Frequency

Discharge Pipe Temperature Control The discharge pipe temperature is used as the internal temperature of the compressor. If the discharge pipe temperature rises above a certain level, the upper limit of frequency is set to keep the discharge pipe temperature from rising further.

Detail Stop zone A Dropping zone

B Keep zone Discharge pipe temperature

Control When the temperature reaches the stop zone, the compressor stops.

Dropping zone Keep zone

The upper limit of frequency decreases. The upper limit of frequency is kept.

The upper limit of frequency is canceled.

112 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

An input current is detected by the CT while the compressor is running, and the frequency upper limit is set from the input current. In case of heat pump models, this control which is the upper limit control of the frequency takes priority over the lower limit control of four way valve operation compensation.

Detail Compressor Stop Stop Zone Dropping Zone Keep Zone

Frequency control in each zone Stop zone After 2.5 seconds in this zone, the compressor is stopped. Dropping zone The upper limit of the compressor frequency is defined as operation frequency – 2 Hz. After this, the output frequency is lowered by 2 Hz every second until it reaches the keep zone. Keep zone The present maximum frequency goes on. Reset zone Limit of the frequency is canceled. Limitation of current dropping and stop value according to the outdoor temperature The current drops when outdoor temperature becomes higher than a certain level (depending on the model).

Freeze-up Protection Control

During cooling operation, the signals sent from the indoor unit control the operating frequency limitation and prevent freezing of the indoor heat exchanger. (The signal from the indoor unit is divided into zones.)

The operating frequency limitation is judged with the indoor heat exchanger temperature 2 seconds after operation starts and 30 seconds after the number of operation room is changed. (Reference)

Indoor heat exchanger thermistor temperature

13˚C Reset zone 11˚C Up zone 9˚C Keep zone 7˚C

0˚C Dropping zone Stop zone (R14913)

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Heating Peak-cut Control During heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature determines the frequency upper limit to prevent abnormal high pressure.

The operating frequency is judged with the indoor heat exchanger temperature 2 minutes after the operation starts and F seconds after the number of operation room is changed. The maximum value of the indoor heat exchanger temperature controls the following (excluding stopped rooms). Stop zone

A˚C B˚C Dropping zone

D˚C Up zone Reset zone

Indoor heat exchanger thermistor temperature

Control When the temperature reaches the stop zone, the compressor stops.

Dropping zone Keep zone

The upper limit of frequency decreases. The upper limit of frequency is kept.

The upper limit of frequency increases. The upper limit of frequency is canceled.

Function and Control

Outdoor Fan Control 1. Fan ON control to cool down the electrical box The outdoor fan is turned ON when the electrical box temperature is high while the compressor is OFF. 2. Fan OFF control during defrosting The outdoor fan is turned OFF while defrosting. 3. Fan OFF delay when stopped The outdoor fan is turned OFF 60 seconds after the compressor stops. 4. Fan speed control for pressure difference upkeep The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is controlled for keeping the pressure difference during cooling operation with low outdoor temperature. When the pressure difference is low, the rotation speed of the outdoor fan is reduced. When the pressure difference is high, the rotation speed of the outdoor fan is controlled as well as normal operation. 5. Fan control when the number of heating room decreases When the outdoor temperature is more than 10°C, the fan is turned off for 30 seconds. 6. Fan speed control during forced operation The outdoor fan is controlled as well as normal operation during the forced operation. 7. Fan speed control during POWERFUL operation The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is increased during the POWERFUL operation. 8. Fan speed control during indoor / outdoor unit quiet operation The rotation speed of the outdoor fan is reduced by the command of the indoor / outdoor unit quiet operation. 9. Fan ON/OFF control when operation starts / stops The outdoor fan is turned ON when the operation starts. The outdoor fan is turned OFF when the operation stops.

Liquid Compression Protection Function

In order to obtain the dependability of the compressor, the compressor is stopped according to the outdoor temperature and temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger.

Operation stops depending on the outdoor temperature The compressor turns off under the conditions that the system is in cooling operation and outdoor temperature is below –12°C.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Defrosting is carried out by the cooling cycle (reverse cycle). The defrosting time or outdoor heat exchanger temperature must be more than a certain value to finish.

Conditions for Starting Defrost The starting conditions are determined with the outdoor temperature and the outdoor heat exchanger temperature. The system is in heating operation. The compressor operates for 6 minutes. More than 38 minutes of accumulated time pass after the start of the operation, or ending the previous defrosting. Conditions for Canceling Defrost The target heat exchanger temperature as the canceling condition is selected in the range of 4 ~ 12°C according to the outdoor temperature. B Hz A Hz PI control

ON OFF Outdoor electronic expansion valve opening (operating room)

400 pulse Initial opening

Outdoor electronic expansion valve opening (stop room)

Initial opening (R17160)

Function and Control

Control Specification

The upper limit of high pressure in a low Hz zone is set. The upper limit of the indoor heat exchanger temperature is also set by the operating frequency. Zones are divided into three, reset zone, keep zone, and dropping zone, and the frequency control is carried out according to each zone.

A Dropping zone Reset zone

Highest indoor heat exchanger temperature among operating rooms

Dropping: The system stops 2 minutes after staying in the dropping zone.

4.12 Outdoor Electronic Expansion Valve Control Outline

The following items are included in the outdoor electronic expansion valve control. Outdoor electronic expansion valve is fully closed 1. Outdoor electronic expansion valve is fully closed when turning on the power. 2. Pressure equalizing control Room Distribution Control 1. Gas pipe isothermal control 2. SC (subcooling) control 3. Liquid pipe temperature control (with all ports connected and all rooms being airconditioned) 4. Liquid pipe temperature control for stopped rooms 5. Dew prevention control for indoor rotor Open Control 1. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control when starting operation 2. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control when the frequency changes 3. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control for defrosting 4. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control for oil recovery 5. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control when a discharge pipe temperature is abnormally high 6. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control when the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected 7. Outdoor electronic expansion valve control for indoor unit freeze-up protection Feedback Control 1. Target discharge pipe temperature control

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control when the frequency changes

Control for abnormally high discharge pipe temperature

Oil recovery control

Indoor freeze-up protection control

Liquid pipe temperature control

Liquid pipe temperature control for non-operating units

Dew prevention control for indoor rotor

The followings are the examples of the outdoor electronic expansion valve control which function in each operation mode.

Fully closed when power is turned on

Open control when starting

Control when the operating room is changed

Pressure equalizing control

Open control when starting

Control when the operating room is changed

Pressure equalizing control

Open control when starting

Pressure equalizing control

z : Holding Functions — : No Functions When power is turned on

Cooling, 1 room operation

Cooling, 2 rooms operation to Cooling, 4 rooms operation

Heating, 1 room operation

Heating, 2 rooms operation

1 : When all the indoor units are operating, “liquid pipe temperature control” is conducted. 2 : “SC (subcooling) control” is conducted for the operating indoor units, when some of the units are not operating. 3 : “Liquid pipe temperature control for stopped room” is conducted for the non-operating indoor units.

118 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Control Specification

4.12.1 Fully Closing with Power on The outdoor electronic expansion valve is initialized when the power is turned on. The opening position is set and the pressure equalization is developed.

4.12.2 Pressure Equalizing Control When the compressor is stopped, the pressure equalizing control is activated. The outdoor electronic expansion valve opens, and develops the pressure equalization.

4.12.3 Opening Limit Control Outline

A maximum and minimum opening of the outdoor electronic expansion valve are limited.

A maximum outdoor electronic expansion valve opening in the operating room: 450 pulses A minimum outdoor electronic expansion valve opening in the operating room: 75 pulses The outdoor electronic expansion valve is fully closed in the room where cooling is stopped and is opened at a fixed degree during defrosting.

4.12.4 Starting Operation Control / Changing Operation Room The outdoor electronic expansion valve opening is controlled when the operation starts, and prevents superheating or liquid compression.

4.12.5 Control when the Frequency Changes When the target discharge pipe temperature control is active, if the target frequency is changed to a specified value in a certain time period, the target discharge pipe temperature control is canceled and the target opening of the outdoor electronic expansion valve is changed.

4.12.6 Oil Recovery Function Outline

The outdoor electronic expansion valve opening in the cooling stopped room is set as to open for a certain time at a specified interval so that the oil in the cooling stopped room may not be accumulated.

During cooling operation, every 1 hour continuous operation, the outdoor electronic expansion valves in the operation stopped room is opened by 80 pulses for specified time.

4.12.7 High Discharge Pipe Temperature Control When the compressor is operating, if the discharge pipe temperature exceeds a certain value, the outdoor electronic expansion valve opens and the refrigerant runs to the low pressure side. This procedure lowers the discharge pipe temperature.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor is detected by comparing the discharge pipe temperature with the condensing temperature. If the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected, the outdoor electronic expansion valve opens according to the outdoor temperature and the operation frequency, and operates for a specified time, and then stops. After 3 minutes, the operation restarts and checks if the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected. If the discharge pipe thermistor is disconnected, the system stops after operating for a specified time. If the disconnection is detected repeatedly, the system is shut down. When the compressor runs for 60 minutes without any error, the error counter is reset.

Detect Disconnection When the starting control (660 ~ 810 seconds) finishes, the following adjustment is made. 1. When the operation mode is cooling When the following condition is fulfilled, the discharge pipe thermistor disconnection is ascertained. Discharge pipe temperature + 6°C < outdoor heat exchanger temperature 2. When the operation mode is heating When the following condition is fulfilled, the discharge pipe thermistor disconnection is ascertained. Discharge pipe temperature + 6°C < highest indoor heat exchanger temperature Adjustment when the thermistor is disconnected When the disconnection is ascertained, the compressor continues operation for 9 minutes and then stops. If the compressor stops repeatedly, the system is shut down.

4.12.9 Gas Pipe Isothermal Control During Cooling When the units are operating in multiple rooms, the gas pipe temperature is detected and the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening is adjusted so that the temperature of the gas pipe in each room becomes equal. When the gas pipe temperature > the average gas pipe temperature, → open the outdoor electronic expansion valve in that room When the gas pipe temperature < the average gas pipe temperature, → close the outdoor electronic expansion valve in that room The temperatures are monitored every 40 seconds.

4.12.10 SC (Subcooling) Control Outline

The liquid pipe temperature and the heat exchanger temperature are detected and the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening is compensated so that the SC of each room becomes the target SC. When the actual SC is > target SC, open the outdoor electronic expansion valve of the room. When the actual SC is < target SC, close the outdoor electronic expansion valve of the room.

Start Conditions After finishing the starting control (660 ~ 810 seconds), (all) the outdoor electronic expansion valve(s) for the operating room is/are controlled. Determine Outdoor Electronic Expansion Valve Opening The outdoor electronic expansion valve opening is adjusted so that the temperature difference between the maximum heat exchanger temperature of connected room and the liquid pipe temperature thermistor becomes constant.

120 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Control Specification

4.12.11Target Discharge Pipe Temperature Control The target discharge pipe temperature is obtained from the indoor and outdoor heat exchanger temperature, and the outdoor electronic expansion valve opening is adjusted so that the actual discharge pipe temperature becomes close to the target discharge pipe temperature. (Indirect SH (superheating) control using the discharge pipe temperature) The target discharge pipe temperature is set as to become the aiming SH.

The inclination does not change depending on the operating condition. SH (Superheat)

The outdoor electronic expansion valve opening and the target discharge pipe temperature are adjusted every 20 seconds. The target discharge pipe temperature is controlled by indoor heat exchanger temperature and outdoor heat exchanger temperature. The opening degree of the outdoor electronic expansion valve is controlled by the followings. Target discharge pipe temperature Actual discharge pipe temperature Previous discharge pipe temperature

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control Specification

4.13 Malfunctions 4.13.1 Sensor Malfunction Detection Sensor malfunction may occur either in the thermistor or current transformer (CT) system. Relating to Thermistor Malfunction 1. Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor 2. Discharge pipe thermistor 3. Radiation fin thermistor 4. Gas pipe thermistor 5. Outdoor temperature thermistor 6. Liquid pipe thermistor Relating to CT Malfunction Refer to “CT or related abnormality” on page 315 for detail.

4.13.2 Detection of Overcurrent and Overload Outline

In order to protect the inverter, an excessive output current is detected and the OL temperature is observed to protect the compressor.

If the inverter current exceeds 14 ~ 20 A (depending on the model), the system shuts down the compressor. If the OL (compressor head) temperature exceeds 120 ~ 130°C, the compressor stops.

4.13.3 Refrigerant Shortage Control Outline

I : Detecting by power consumption If the power consumption is below the specified value and the frequency is higher than the specified frequency, it is regarded as refrigerant shortage. The power consumption is low comparing with that in the normal operation when refrigerant is insufficient, and refrigerant shortage is detected by checking power consumption.

II : Detecting by discharge pipe temperature If the discharge pipe temperature is higher than the target discharge pipe temperature, and the outdoor electronic expansion valve is fully open for more than the specified time, it is regarded as refrigerant shortage. Target discharge pipe temperature

Refrigerant shortage zone (R1391)

Refer to “Refrigerant shortage” on page 296 for detail.

122 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function and Control

Control Specification

4.13.4 Anti-icing Function During cooling, if the indoor heat exchanger temperature in the operation stopped room becomes below the specified temperature for the specified time, the outdoor electronic expansion valve is opened in the operation stopped room as specified, and the fully closed operation is carried out. After this, if freezing abnormality occurs more than specified time, the system shuts down as the system abnormality.

Function and Control Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

System Configuration

1. System Configuration After installation and trial operation of the room air conditioner are completed, the air conditioner should be handled and operated as described in the following pages. Every user should be informed on the correct method of operation and how to check if it can cool (or heat) well, and how to use it efficiently. Providing instructions to the user can reduce requests for servicing by 80%. However proficient the installation and operating functions of the air conditioning system are, the customer may fault either the room air conditioner or its installation work when it is actually due to improper handling. The installation work and the handing-over of the unit can only be considered completed when its handling has been fully explained to the user without using technical terms, and while imparting full knowledge of the equipment.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. RA Indoor Unit 2.1

FTXG, FTXS-K, CTXS, FVXG Series - ARC466A1, A2, A6

2.1.1 Manual Contents and Reference Page Wall Mounted Type Model Series

FTXS20/25K2V1B CTXS15/35K2V1B FVXG25-50K2V1B Read Before Operation Names of Parts

Preparation before Operation

Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation

Note for Multi System

1: Illustrations are for FTXS-K and CTXS-K series as representative. 2: Illustrations are for FVXG series as representative.

Name of Parts Indoor Unit

INTELLIGENT EYE sensor

• Appearance of the indoor unit may differ.

• It detects the movements of people and automatically switches between normal operation and energy saving operation.

Front panel Air outlet

Room temperature sensor • It detects the air temperature around the unit.

Louvers (vertical blades) • The louvers are inside of the air outlet.

Display INTELLIGENT EYE lamp (green)

Multi-monitor lamp and TIMER lamp Multi-monitor lamp • The lamp colour changes according to the operation.

Signal receiver and Indoor unit ON/OFF switch

Signal receiver • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a beep sound. Case

• Press this switch once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. • The operation mode refer to the following table. Temperature setting

• When operation by timer has been set, the multi-monitor lamp periodically changes to orange. After lighting orange for about 5 seconds, it returns to the colour of the operation mode. The multi-monitor lamp will turn orange on and off in cyclic manner while the air conditioner is not in operation. TIMER lamp colour

TIMER lamp colour : For COOL Airflow rate AUTO

• This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing.

2 sec. 5 sec. Orange

Open the front panel

Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter

Name of Parts Remote Controller

Signal transmitter Receiver

Display (LCD) • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with its displays on for the purpose of explanation.)

• To use the remote controller, aim the transmitter at the indoor unit. If there is anything to block signals between the unit and the remote controller, such as a curtain, the unit will not operate. • Do not drop the remote controller. Do not get it wet. • The maximum distance for communication is approx. 6m. Make sure that there are no obstacles within 50cm under the signal receiver. Such obstacles, if any, may have an adverse influence on the reception performance of the receiver and the reception distance may be shortened.

TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons • It changes the temperature setting.

ON/OFF button • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.

FAN setting button • It selects the airflow rate setting.

Front cover • Open the front cover.

POWERFUL button • POWERFUL operation.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Open the front cover

MODE selector button • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/ FAN)

ECONO button • ECONO operation.

SWING button • Adjusting the airflow direction.

• COMFORT AIRFLOW operation.

• It cannot be used for the WEEKLY TIMER operation.

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B Name of Parts Indoor Unit

INTELLIGENT EYE sensor • It detects the movements of people and automatically switches between normal operation and energy saving operation.

Room temperature sensor

• It detects the air temperature around the unit.

Flap (horizontal blade)

Display OPERATION lamp (green)

Signal receiver • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a beep sound. Case

Indoor unit ON/OFF switch • Press this switch once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. • The operation mode refers to the following table. Mode

• This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Open the front panel

Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter

Name of Parts Remote Controller

Display (LCD) • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with its displays on for the purpose of explanation.)

TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons • It changes the temperature setting.

FAN setting button • It selects the airflow rate setting.

ON/OFF button • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.

POWERFUL button • POWERFUL operation.

Front cover • Open the front cover.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Open the front cover

MODE selector button • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/ FAN)

ECONO button • ECONO operation.

SWING button • Adjusting the airflow direction.

TIMER CANCEL button • It cancels the timer setting. • It cannot be used for the WEEKLY TIMER operation.

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Name of Parts Indoor Unit

Air inlet Room temperature sensor • It detects the air temperature around the unit.

Signal receiver and Indoor unit ON/OFF switch Signal receiver • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a beep sound. Case Operation start Setting changed Operation stop

Sound type beep-beep beep long beep

Indoor unit ON/OFF switch • Press this switch once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. • The operation mode refer to the following table. Mode

25˚C RADIANT lamp (red)

• This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Open the front panel

CAUTION • The surface of the radiant panel becomes very hot during RADIANT operation. Do not touch the panel of the main unit directly. After the operation is complete, do not remove or care and clean the panel until the surface temperature of the panel decreases.

Air filter (upper) Air filter (lower) Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter • It is inside of air filter (lower).

136 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Name of Parts Remote Controller

Signal transmitter Receiver

Display (LCD) • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with its displays on for the purpose of explanation.) • To use the remote controller, aim the transmitter at the indoor unit. If there is anything to block signals between the unit and the remote controller, such as a curtain, the unit will not operate. • Do not drop the remote controller. Do not get it wet. • The maximum distance for communication is approximately 7m.

TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons • It changes the temperature setting.

ON/OFF button • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.

FAN setting button • It selects the airflow rate setting.

RADIANT switching button

• RADIANT operation.

• Open the front cover.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Open the front cover

MODE selector button • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)

ECONO button • ECONO operation.

SWING button • Adjusting the airflow direction.

• It cancels the timer setting. • It cannot be used for the WEEKLY TIMER operation.

2.1.3 Preparation before Operation

Preparation before Operation To set the batteries

2 Position + and – correctly!

1. Slide the front cover to take it off. 2. Set two dry batteries AAA.LR03 (alkaline). 3. Set the front cover as before. To fix the remote controller holder on the wall

1. Choose a place from where the signals reach the unit.

2. Fix the holder to a wall, a pillar, or similar location with the screws procured locally

3. Place the remote controller in the remote Screws

Remote controller holder

NOTE Notes on batteries • When replacing the batteries, use batteries of the same type, and replace both old batteries together. • When the system is not used for a long time, take the batteries out. • The batteries will last for approximately 1 year. If the remote controller display begins to fade and the degradation of reception performance occurs within a year, however, replace both batteries with new, size AAA.LR03 (alkaline). • The attached batteries are provided for the initial use of the system. The usable period of the batteries may be short depending on the manufactured date of the air conditioner.

Notes on remote controller • Never expose the remote controller to direct sunlight. • Dust on the signal transmitter or receiver will reduce the sensitivity. Wipe off dust with soft cloth. • Signal communication may be disabled if an electronic-starter-type fluorescent lamp (such as inverter-type lamps) is in the room. Consult the shop if that is the case. • If the remote controller signals happen to operate another appliance, move that appliance to somewhere else, or consult the service shop.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Turn the breaker on • After the power is turned on, the flap of the indoor unit opens and closes once to set the reference position.

to set the current day of the week.

to set the clock to the present time. or

rapidly increases or decreases the time display.

• Point the remote controller at the indoor unit when pressing the buttons. • “ ” blinks.

NOTE Note on setting the clock • If the indoor unit’s internal clock is not set to the correct time, the ON TIMER, OFF TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER will not operate punctually.

140 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.4 AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation FTXG25/35/50JV1BW(A)

AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice. From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.

To start operation

and select an operation mode.

• Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The multi-monitor lamp lights up. The colour of the lamp varies depending on the operation mode.

•“ ” disappears from the LCD. • The multi-monitor lamp goes off.

NOTE MODE Notes on each operation mode

• Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner. • The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of HEAT operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer. • In HEAT operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost. • During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.

• This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside. Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high

• The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable. • In AUTO operation, the system selects an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room and outside temperatures and starts the operation. • The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level. • This mode is valid for fan only.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To change the temperature setting

• The displayed items on the LCD will change whenever either one of the buttons is pressed. COOL operation

18-30˚C Press to raise the temperature and press temperature.

DRY or FAN operation The temperature setting is not variable.

Operating conditions Recommended temperature setting • For cooling: 26-28˚C • For heating: 20-24˚C

Tips for saving energy • Be careful not to cool (heat) the room too much. Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate level helps save energy. • Cover windows with a blind or a curtain. Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases the cooling (heating) effect. • Clogged air filters cause inefficient operation and waste energy. Clean them once in about every 2 weeks.

Notes on the operating conditions • The outdoor unit consumes some power to have its electric components work even while it is not operating. Connecting outdoor unit RXG25/35: 1-15W Other outdoor units: 15-20W The outdoor unit consumes 40 to 55W of power at the time of compressor preheating. • If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker off. • Use the air conditioner in the following conditions. Operating conditions

MODE If operation is continued out of this range

COOL Outdoor temperature : <2/3/4/5MXS> –10-46˚C <RXG> –10-46˚C Indoor temperature : 18-32˚C Indoor humidity : 80% max.

• A safety device may work to stop the operation. (In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the outdoor unit only.) • Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

Outdoor temperature : <2MXS> –10-24˚C <3/4/5MXS> –15-24˚C <RXG> –15-24˚C Indoor temperature : 10-30˚C

• A safety device may work to stop the operation.

HEAT DRY Outdoor temperature : <2/3/4/5MXS> –10-46˚C <RXG> –10-46˚C Indoor temperature : 18-32˚C Indoor humidity : 80% max.

• A safety device may work to stop the operation. • Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

• Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.

142 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice. From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.

To start operation

and select an operation mode.

• Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.

• “ ” disappears from the LCD. • The OPERATION lamp goes off.

NOTE MODE HEAT Notes on each operation mode • Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner. • The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of HEAT operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer. • In HEAT operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost. • During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit.

• This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside. Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To change the temperature setting

• The displayed items on the LCD will change whenever either one of the buttons is pressed. COOL operation

18-30˚C Press to raise the temperature and press temperature.

DRY or FAN operation The temperature setting is not variable.

Operating conditions Recommended temperature setting • For cooling: 26-28˚C • For heating: 20-24˚C

Notes on the operating conditions • The outdoor unit consumes some power to have its electric components work even while it is not operating. Connecting outdoor unit RXS20/25: 1-15W Other outdoor units: 15-20W The outdoor unit consumes 40 to 55W of power at the time of compressor preheating. • If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker off. • Use the air conditioner in the following conditions.

MODE Operating conditions

COOL Outdoor temperature: <2MXS> 10-46˚C <3/4/5MXS> –10-46˚C <RXS> –10-46˚C Indoor temperature: 18-32˚C Indoor humidity: 80% max.

HEAT Outdoor temperature: <2/3/4/5MXS> –15-24˚C

<RXS> –15-24˚C Indoor temperature: 10-30˚C DRY Outdoor temperature: <2MXS> 10-46˚C <3/4/5MXS> –10-46˚C <RXS> –10-46˚C Indoor temperature: 18-32˚C Indoor humidity: 80% max.

If operation is continued out of this range • A safety device may work to stop the operation. (In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the outdoor unit only.) • Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

• A safety device may work to stop the operation.

• A safety device may work to stop the operation. • Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

• Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.

144 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice. From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.

To start operation

and select an operation mode.

• Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.

•“ ” disappears from the LCD. • The OPERATION lamp goes off.

NOTE MODE HEAT COOL DRY AUTO FAN Notes on each operation mode • Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner. • The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of HEAT operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer. • In HEAT operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost. • During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit. • This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside. Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high. • When the outdoor temperature is lower than 10˚C, do not use COOL operation. If the operation is used when the outdoor temperature is lower than 10˚C, the protective function of the main unit works and this disables the operation. • The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable. • In AUTO operation, the system selects an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room and outside temperatures and starts the operation. • The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level. • This mode is valid for fan only.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.5 RADIANT Operation

RADIANT Operation The RADIANT operation provides a comfortable environment with quiet and currentless heating operation in addition to the HEAT operation mode. The RADIANT operation has 2 operation modes.

To start RADIANT operation

and select an HEAT operation.

• Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.

and select a RADIANT operation.

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The RADIANT lamp lights red. • This button can be used only in the HEAT operation mode. • When the RADIANT operation starts, the temperature of the radiant panel increases.

RADIANT operation with HEAT RADIANT operation

RADIANT1 • Use this operation when the difference between the set temperature and indoor temperature is large, or to warm up the room quickly.

RADIANT2 • Use this operation to prioritize quiet and currentless heating operation, or when the noise from RADIANT1 operation bothers you. The gentle breeze operation starts from the beginning.

CAUTION • During the RADIANT operation, the surface temperature of the panel will be about 55˚C at maximum. Even after the RADIANT operation is finished, the surface temperature of the panel of the air conditioner stays hot for a while. Do not touch the air conditioner until the surface temperature of the panel decreases. Be careful that children do not touch the surface of the panel.

NOTE Notes on RADIANT operation • If RADIANT2 operation does not warm up the room, use HEAT or RADIANT1 operation. • RADIANT1 can be used with POWERFUL operation. RADIANT2 cannot be used with the POWERFUL operation. • This operation may not warm up the room adequately depending on conditions such as an extremely low outside temperature and lack of adequate performance. • The RADIANT operation uses the auto fan speed, so the airflow rate cannot be changed. • When the indoor units are connected using a multi system, please refer to “Selecting the operation mode” in note for multi system.

146 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Temperature Setting To change the temperature setting

• The displayed items on the LCD will change whenever either one of the buttons is pressed. COOL operation

18-32˚C HEAT or RADIANT operation

10-30˚C AUTO operation

Press to raise the temperature and press temperature.

DRY or FAN operation

18-30˚C to lower the

The temperature setting is not variable.

Operating conditions Recommended temperature setting • For cooling: 26-28˚C • For heating: 20-24˚C

MODE Operating conditions Outdoor temperature : <2/3/4/5MXS> 10-46˚C <RXG> 10-46˚C COOL Indoor temperature : 18-32˚C Indoor humidity : 80% max. Outdoor temperature : <2MXS> –10-24˚C <3/4/5MXS> –15-24˚C HEAT or <RXG> –15-24˚C RADIANT Indoor temperature : 10-30˚C Outdoor temperature : <2/3/4/5MXS> 10-46˚C <RXG> 10-46˚C DRY Indoor temperature : 18-32˚C Indoor humidity : 80% max.

• A safety device may work to stop the operation. • Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

• Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.7 Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate FTXG25/35/50JV1BW(A)

Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To start auto swing Upper and lower airflow direction

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The flaps (horizontal blades) will begin to swing.

To set the flaps at desired position • This function is effective while flaps are in auto swing mode.

Press when the flaps have reached the desired position. •“

” disappears from the LCD.

To adjust the louvers at desired position Hold the knob and move the louvers. • You will find a knob on the left-side and the right-side blades. • When the unit is installed in the corner of a room, the direction of the louvers (vertical blades) should be facing away from the wall. If they face the wall, the wall will block off the wind, causing the cooling (or heating) efficiency to drop. • If the flaps are in the way, press on the remote controller to move the flaps out of the way and then adjust the louvers.

148 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To adjust the airflow rate setting

advances the airflow rate setting in sequence.

NOTE Note on the angles of the flaps • The flaps swinging range depends on the operation. (See the figure.) COOL and DRY operation COMFORT AIRFLOW

COMFORT AIRFLOW Stop operation Lower limit

Note on airflow rate setting • At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller. • If the air conditioner is operated in COOL or DRY operation with the flaps kept stopped in the downward direction, the flaps will automatically start operating in approximately an hour in order to prevent dew condensation.

CAUTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flaps. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To start auto swing Upper and lower airflow direction

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The flap (horizontal blade) will begin to swing.

To set the flap at desired position • This function is effective while flap is in auto swing mode.

Press when the flap has reached the desired position. •“

” disappears from the LCD.

on the remote controller to move the flap out of

the way and then adjust the louvers.

150 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To adjust the airflow rate setting

advances the airflow rate setting in sequence.

• When the airflow is set to “ ”, indoor unit quiet operation will start and the noise from the unit will become quieter. • In indoor unit quiet operation, the airflow rate is set to a weak level. • If the temperature does not reach the desired point in the indoor unit quiet operation, change the airflow rate setting. • In DRY mode, the airflow rate setting is not variable.

NOTE Notes on the angles of the flap • The flap swinging range depends on the operation. (See the figure.) COOL and DRY operation

Stop operation COMFORT AIRFLOW 0˚ 5˚ Upper limit 45˚ Lower limit

Stop operation 0˚ 15˚ Upper limit 50˚ 45˚ Lower limit

• If the air conditioner is operated in COOL or DRY operation with the flap kept stopped in the downward direction, the flap will automatically start operating in approximately an hour in order to prevent dew condensation.

Note on airflow rate setting • At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

CAUTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flap. If you attempt to move the flap and louvers forcibly with hand when they are swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To start auto swing Upper and lower airflow direction

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The flap (horizontal blade) will begin to swing.

To set the flap at desired position • This function is effective while flap is in auto swing mode.

Press when the flap has reached the desired position. •“

” disappears from the LCD.

To adjust the louvers at desired position Hold the knob and move the louvers. • You will find a knob on the left-side and the right-side blades. • When the unit is installed in the corner of a room, the direction of the louvers (vertical blades) should be facing away from the wall. If they face the wall, the wall will block off the wind, causing the cooling (or heating) efficiency to drop. • If the flap is in the way, press on the remote controller to move the flap out of the way and then adjust the louvers.

152 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Adjusting the Airflow Direction and Rate To adjust the airflow rate setting

advances the airflow rate setting in sequence.

• When the airflow is set to “ ”, indoor unit quiet operation will start and the noise from the unit will become quieter. • In indoor unit quiet operation, the airflow rate is set to a weak level. • In DRY or RADIANT operation, the airflow rate setting is not variable.

NOTE Note on the angles of the flap • The flap swinging range is the same by all operation. (See the figure.) Upper limit 70˚ Lower limit

Note on airflow rate setting • At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

CAUTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flap. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in COOL operation and in the downward direction while in HEAT operation, which will provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with people.

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • Airflow rate is set to Auto. COOL/DRY: The flap will go up. HEAT: The flap will go down.

• The flaps will return to the memory position from before COMFORT AIRFLOW operation. • “ ” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation • The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room. • POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • The airflow rate will be set to Auto. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be canceled.

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation “INTELLIGENT EYE” is the infrared sensor which detects the human movement. If nobody in the room for more than 20 minutes, the operation automatically changes to energy saving operation.

•“ ” disappears from the LCD. • The INTELLIGENT EYE lamp goes off.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation [Example]

When someone is in the room

When no one is in the room 20 minutes after, start energy saving operation.

Normal operation • The air conditioner is in normal operation while the sensor is detecting the movement of people.

Someone is back in the room Back to normal operation.

• The set temperature is shifted in ±2˚C steps.

• The air conditioner will return to normal operation when the sensor detects the movement of people again.

INTELLIGENT EYE operation is useful for energy saving Energy saving operation • If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes, the energy saving operation will start. • This operation changes the temperature –2˚C in HEAT / +2˚C in COOL / +1˚C in DRY operation from set temperature. When the room temperature exceeds 30˚C, the operation changes the temperature +1˚C in COOL / +1˚C in DRY operation from set temperature. • This operation decreases the airflow rate slightly in FAN operation only.

NOTE Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE operation • Application range is as follows. Vertical angle 90˚ (Side view)

Horizontal angle 110˚ (Top view)

• Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range.)

• Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc. • The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby. • INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during POWERFUL operation. • NIGHT SET mode will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

CAUTION • Do not place large objects near the sensor. Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensor’s detection area. This sensor can detect undesirable objects. • Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.

156 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.10 POWERFUL Operation

FTXG25/35/50JV1BW(A), FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B POWERFUL Operation POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect in any operation modes. You can get the maximum capacity.

To start POWERFUL operation

• POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates again with the previous settings which were used before POWERFUL operation. •“ ” is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel POWERFUL operation

” disappears from the LCD.

Normal operation • When you want to get the cooling effect quickly, start the POWERFUL operation.

POWERFUL operation • POWERFUL operation will work for 20 minutes.

Back to normal operation

causes the settings to be canceled, and the “

from the LCD. • POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation with its maximum capacity demonstrated.

• In COOL and HEAT operation To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting. The temperature and airflow settings are not variable.

• In DRY operation The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5˚C and the airflow rate is slightly increased.

• In FAN operation The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

• In AUTO operation To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B POWERFUL Operation POWERFUL operation quickly maximises the cooling (heating) effect in any operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.

To start POWERFUL operation

• POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates again with the previous settings which were used before POWERFUL operation. •“ ” is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel POWERFUL operation

” disappears from the LCD.

Normal operation • When you want to get the cooling effect quickly, start the POWERFUL operation.

Back to normal operation

• POWERFUL operation will work for 20 minutes.

NOTE Notes on POWERFUL operation • When using POWERFUL operation, there are some functions which are not available. • POWERFUL operation cannot be used together with RADIANT2, ECONO or OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • POWERFUL operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing causes the settings to be canceled, and the “ ” disappears from the LCD. • POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation with its maximum capacity demonstrated. • In COOL, HEAT and RADIANT1 operation To maximise the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting. The temperature and airflow settings are not variable. • In DRY operation The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5˚C and the airflow rate is slightly increased. • In FAN operation The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting. • In AUTO operation To maximise the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

158 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise level of the outdoor unit by changing the frequency and fan speed on the outdoor unit. This function is convenient during the night.

” disappears from the LCD.

Using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation during the night.

• The noise level of the outdoor unit will be lower. This is convenient when you need to consideration for your neighbourhood.

NOTE Notes on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation • This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO operation. This is not available in RADIANT, FAN and DRY operation. • POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • Even the operation is stopped using the remote controller or the indoor unit ON/OFF switch when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, “ ” will remain on the remote controller display. • OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if they have been already dropped low enough.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ECONO Operation ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the maximum power consumption value. This function is useful for cases in which attention should be paid to ensure a circuit breaker will not trip when the product runs alongside other appliances.

To cancel ECONO operation

” disappears from the LCD.

[Example] Normal operation

• In case the air conditioner and other appliances which require high power consumption are used at same time, a circuit breaker may trip if the air conditioner operate with its maximum capacity.

Running current and power consumption Normal operation

• The maximum power consumption of the air conditioner is limited by using ECONO operation. The circuit breaker will hardly trip even if the air conditioner and other appliances are used at same time.

• This diagram is a representation for illustrative purposes only. Maximum during The maximum running current and power normal operation consumption of the air conditioner in ECONO operation vary with the connecting outdoor Maximum during unit. ECONO operation

ECONO operation Time

NOTE From start up until set temperature is reached

Notes on ECONO operation • ECONO operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing causes the settings to be canceled, and the “ ” disappears from the LCD. • ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit (operating frequency). • ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY, and HEAT operation. This is not available in RADIANT and FAN operation. • POWERFUL operation and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • If the level of power consumption is already low, ECONO operation will not drop the power consumption.

160 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.13 OFF TIMER Operation FTXG25/35/50JV1BW(A)

OFF TIMER Operation Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.

To use OFF TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The multi-monitor lamp blinks twice. The TIMER lamp periodically lights orange.

” and setting time disappear from the LCD. ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD.

NIGHT SET mode • When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5˚C up in COOL, 2.0˚C down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B OFF TIMER Operation Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.

To use OFF TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp lights yellow.

To cancel OFF TIMER operation Press

•“ ” and setting time disappear from the LCD. • “ ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

NIGHT SET mode • When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5°C up in COOL, 2.0°C down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

162 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B OFF TIMER Operation Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.

To use OFF TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The OPERATION lamp blinks and the TIMER lamp lights yellow.

” and setting time disappear from the LCD. ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ON TIMER Operation To use ON TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The multi-monitor lamp blinks twice. The TIMER lamp periodically lights orange.

” and setting time disappear from the LCD. ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER • A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below. (Example) Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating) OFF TIMER at 0:00 Combined ON TIMER at 14:00

NOTE In the following cases, set the timer again. • After a breaker has turned off. • After a power failure. • After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B ON TIMER Operation To use ON TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp lights yellow.

•“ ” and setting time disappear from the LCD. • “ ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER • A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below. (Example) Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating) OFF TIMER at 0:00 Combined ON TIMER at 14:00

NOTE In the following cases, set the timer again. • After a breaker has turned off. • After a power failure. • After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B ON TIMER Operation To use ON TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and day of the week disappear from the LCD.

until the time setting reaches the

point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the time setting rapidly.

•“ ” and setting time are displayed on the LCD. • The OPERATION lamp blinks and the TIMER lamp lights yellow.

” and setting time disappear from the LCD. ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER • A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below. (Example) Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating) OFF TIMER at 0:00 ON TIMER at 14:00

NOTE In the following cases, set the timer again. • After a breaker has turned off. • After a power failure. • After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

2.1.15 WEEKLY TIMER Operation

WEEKLY TIMER Operation Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week. It is convenient if the WEEKLY TIMER is set according to the family’s life style.

Using in these cases of WEEKLY TIMER [Example] [Monday]

The same timer settings are made for the week from Monday through Friday while different timer settings are made for the weekend.

Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. Program 1

[Tuesday] to [Friday]

ON OFF Use the copy mode to make settings for Tuesday to Friday, because these settings are the same as those for Monday. Program 1

No timer settings Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. Program 1

• Up to 4 reservations per day and 28 reservations per week can be set in the WEEKLY TIMER. The effective use of the copy mode ensures ease of making reservations. • The use of ON-ON-ON-ON settings, for example, makes it possible to schedule operating mode and set temperature changes. Furthermore, by using OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF settings, only the turn off time of each day can be set. This will turn off the air conditioner automatically if the user forgets to turn it off.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To use WEEKLY TIMER operation Setting mode • Make sure the day of the week and time are set. If not, set the day of the week and time. Program 1

• The day of the week and the reservation number of the current day will be displayed. • 1 to 4 settings can be made per day

to select the desired day of the week

and reservation number. • Pressing

changes the reservation number and the day of the week.

• The day of the week and reservation number will be set. •“ ” and “ ” blink.

to select the desired mode. changes “

” setting in sequence.

Pressing alternates the following items appearing on the LCD in rotational sequence.

• In case the reservation has already been set, selecting “blank” deletes the reservation. • Go to step 9 if “blank” is selected. • To return to the day of the week and reservation number setting, press

WEEKLY TIMER Operation 6. Press

to select the desired time.

• The time can be set between 0:00 and 23:50 in 10 minute intervals. • To return to the ON/OFF TIMER mode setting, press

to select the desired temperature.

• The temperature can be set between 10˚C and 32˚C. COOL or AUTO: The unit operates at 18˚C even if it is set at 10 to 17˚C. HEAT or AUTO: The unit operates at 30˚C even if it is set at 31 to 32˚C. • To return to the time setting, press . • The set temperature is only displayed when the mode setting is on.

• Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone and flashing the OPERATION lamp. • The temperature is set while in ON TIMER operation, and the time is set while in OFF TIMER operation. • The next reservation screen will appear. • To continue further settings, repeat the procedure from step 4. • The TIMER lamp lights yellow.

to complete the setting.

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated. • A reservation made once can be easily copied and the same settings used for another day of the week. Refer to copy mode.

NOTE Notes on WEEKLY TIMER operation • Do not forget to set the clock on the remote controller first. • The day of the week, ON/OFF TIMER mode, time and set temperature (only for ON TIMER mode) can be set with WEEKLY TIMER. Other settings for ON TIMER are based on the settings just before the operation. • Both WEEKLY TIMER and ON/OFF TIMER operation cannot be used at the same time. The ON/OFF TIMER operation has priority if it is set while WEEKLY TIMER is still active. The WEEKLY TIMER will go into standby state, and “ ” will disappear from the LCD. When ON/OFF TIMER is up, the WEEKLY TIMER will automatically become active. • Shutting the breaker off, power failure, and other similar events will render operation of the indoor unit’s internal clock inaccurate. Reset the clock.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copy mode • A reservation made once can be copied to another day of the week. The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied. Program 1

[Tuesday] to [Friday]

to confirm the day of the week to be

• The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied.

to select the destination day of the

• Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone and flashing the OPERATION lamp. • The reservation will be copied to the selected day of the week. The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied. • To continue copying the settings to other days of the week, repeat step 4 and step 5.

to complete the setting. ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated.

NOTE Note on copy mode • The entire reservation of the source day of the week is copied in the copy mode. In the case of making a reservation change for any day of the week individually after copying the content of weekly reservations, press and change the settings in the steps of setting mode.

170 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WEEKLY TIMER Operation Confirming a reservation • The reservation can be confirmed.

• The day of the week and the reservation number of the current day will be displayed.

to select the day of the week and the

reservation number to be confirmed. • Pressing

displays the reservation details.

• To change the confirmed reserved settings, select the reservation number and press . The mode is switched to setting mode. Go to setting mode step 2.

to exit confirming mode.

” is displayed on the

• The “ ” will disappear from the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off. • To reactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation, press • If a reservation deactivated with will be used.

is activated once again, the last reservation mode

CAUTION • If not all the reservation settings are reflected, deactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation once. Then press WEEKLY TIMER operation.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

again to reactivate the

To delete reservations The individual reservation

• The day of the week and the reservation number will be displayed.

to select the day of the week and the

reservation number to be deleted.

Pressing alternates the following items appearing on the LCD in rotational sequence. • The reservation will be no setting with selecting “blank”.

• The selected reservation will be deleted.

• If there are still other reservations, WEEKLY TIMER operation will be activated.

The reservations for each day of the week • This function can be used for deleting reservations for each day of the week. • It can be used while confirming or setting reservations.

to select the day of the week to be

• The reservation of the selected day of the week will be deleted.

for 5 seconds while normal display.

• Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone. • This operation is not effective while WEEKLY TIMER is being set. • All reservations will be deleted.

172 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.1.16 Note for Multi System

Note for Multi System Multi system has one outdoor unit connected to multiple indoor units.

Selecting the operation mode With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present. When more than one indoor unit is operating, priority is given to the first unit that was turned on. In this case, set the units that are turned on later to the same operation mode as the first unit. Otherwise, they will enter the standby state, and the OPERATION lamp will flash: this does not indicate malfunction.

NOTE Notes on operation mode for multi system • COOL, DRY and FAN operation may be used at the same time. • HEAT and RADIANT operation may be used at the same time. • AUTO operation automatically selects COOL operation or HEAT operation based on the room temperature. Therefore, AUTO operation is available when selecting the same operation mode as that of the room with the first unit to be turned on.

CAUTION • Normally, the operation mode in the room where the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep this in mind. If the operation mode of the first room is FAN operation, then using HEAT and RADIANT operation in any room after this will give priority to HEAT and RADIANT operation. In this situation, the air conditioner running in FAN operation will go on standby, and the OPERATION lamp will flash. When the RADIANT operation starts when the FAN operation is used in another room, the FAN operation is switched to the HEAT operation.

With the priority room setting active. Refer to priority room setting on the next page.

NIGHT QUIET mode (Available only for COOL operation) NIGHT QUIET mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. NIGHT QUIET mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the nighttime hours to prevent annoyance to neighbours. • The NIGHT QUIET mode is activated when the temperature drops 5˚C or more below the highest temperature recorded that day. Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than 5˚C, this function will not be activated. • NIGHT QUIET mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation Refer to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.

With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present. When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the multi system, set all indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation using their remote controllers. When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units using their remote controller. However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other rooms. We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

With the priority room setting active. Refer to priority room setting on the next page.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

COOL/HEAT mode lock The COOL/HEAT mode lock requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorised dealer for assistance. The COOL/HEAT mode lock sets the unit forcibly to either COOL or HEAT operation. This function is convenient when you wish to set all indoor units connected to the multi system to the same operation mode. During the COOL mode, the DRY operation can also be used. During the HEAT mode, the RADIANT operation can also be used.

NOTE • The COOL/HEAT mode lock cannot be activated together with the priority room setting.

Priority room setting The priority room setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorised dealer for assistance. The room designated as the priority room takes priority in the following situations.

Operation mode priority • As the operation mode of the priority room takes precedence, the user can select a different operation mode from other rooms. [Example] • Room A is the priority room in the examples. When COOL operation is selected in room A while operating the following modes in room B, C and D:

Operation mode in room B, C and D COOL or DRY or FAN HEAT and RADIANT AUTO Status of room B, C and D when the unit in room A is in COOL operation Current operation mode maintained The unit enters standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating. If the unit is set to COOL operation, it continues. If the unit is set to HEAT operation, it enters standby mode. Operation resumes when the room A unit stops operating.

Priority when POWERFUL operation is used [Example] • Room A is the priority room in the examples. The indoor units in rooms A, B, C and D are all operating. If the unit in room A enters POWERFUL operation, operation capacity will be concentrated in room A. In such a case, the cooling (heating) efficiency of the units in room B, C and D may be slightly reduced.

Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation [Example] • Room A is the priority room in the examples. Just by setting the unit in room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. You don’t have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.

174 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B Quick Reference

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B Quick Reference

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.1 Manual Contents and Reference Page Wall Mounted Type

Adjusting the Airflow Direction

Note for Multi System

3P191290-1K Read Before Operation Names of Parts Operation

: The illustrations are for FTXS-J series as representative.

2.2.2 Names of Parts

FTXS20/25/35/42/50J2V1B Names of Parts Indoor Unit

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit 1. Air filter 2. Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter: • These filters are attached to the inside of the air filters. 3. Air inlet

13. Indoor unit ON/OFF switch: • Push this switch once to start operation. Push once again to stop it. • The operation mode refers to the following table. Model

• This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing. 14. OPERATION lamp (green) 15. TIMER lamp (yellow) 16. INTELLIGENT EYE lamp (green) 17. Signal receiver: • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a beep sound. • Operation start beep-beep • Settings changed beep • Operation stop long beep

<ARC452A3> 1. Signal transmitter: • It sends signals to the indoor unit. 2. Display: • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.) 3. FAN setting button: • It selects the airflow rate setting. 4. POWERFUL button: POWERFUL operation 5. ON/OFF button: • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. 6. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: •It changes the temperature setting. 7. MODE selector button: • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)

11. SWING button: • Vertical blades (louvers) 12. COMFORT/SENSOR button: • COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE operation 13. WEEKLY/PROGRAM/COPY/BACK/NEXT button: • WEEKLY TIMER operation 14. SELECT button: • It changes the ON/OFF TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER settings. 15. OFF TIMER button 16. ON TIMER button 17. TIMER CANCEL button: • It cancels the timer setting. • It cannot be used for the WEEKLY TIMER operation. 18. CLOCK button

8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 9. ECONO button: ECONO operation 10. SWING button: • Horizontal blades (flaps)

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS60/71GV1B Names of Parts Indoor Unit

Indoor Unit 1. Air filter 2. Titanium apatite photocatalytic air-purifying filter: •These filters are attached to the inside of the air filters. 3. Air inlet 4. Front panel 5. Panel tab 6. Room temperature sensor: • It senses the air temperature around the unit. 7. INTELLIGENT EYE sensor 8. Display 9. Air outlet 10. Flaps (horizontal blades) 11. Louvers (vertical blades): • The louvers are inside of the air outlet. 12. Model name plate

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

13. Indoor unit ON/OFF switch: • Push this switch once to start operation. Push once again to stop it. • The operation mode refers to the following table. Temperature Airflow Model Mode rate setting COOLING COOL 22˚C AUTO ONLY HEAT AUTO 25˚C AUTO PUMP • This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing. 14. OPERATION lamp (green) 15. TIMER lamp (yellow) 16. INTELLIGENT EYE lamp (green) 17. Signal receiver: • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a beep sound. • Operation start beep-beep • Settings changedbeep • Operation stoplong beep

Names of Parts Remote Controller 1

2. Display (LCD): • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with its displays on for the purpose of explanation.) 3. FAN setting button: • It selects the airflow rate setting.

11. SWING button: • Louvers (vertical blades)

4. POWERFUL button: POWERFUL operation 5. ON/OFF button: • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. 6. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: • It changes the temperature setting. 7. MODE selector button: • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN) 8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

FVXS25/35/50FV1B Names of parts Indoor Unit 1

This setting blows air from upper outlet only.

This setting automatically decides a blow pattern depending on mode and conditions.

• This setting is recommended.

The unit is shipped from the factory with this setting.

CAUTION Before opening the front panel, be sure to stop the operation and turn the breaker OFF. Do not touch the metal parts on the inside of the indoor unit, as it may result in injury.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Indoor Unit 1. Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter: • These filters are attached to the inside of the air filters. 2. Air outlet 3. Display 4. Front panel 5. Vertical blades (louvers) • The louvers are inside of the air outlet. 6. Air inlet 7. Air filter 8. Horizontal blade (flap) 9. Operation lamp (green) 10. TIMER lamp (yellow) 11. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch: • Push this switch once to start operation. Push once again to stop it.

• The operation mode refers to the following table. Model

COOLING ONLY HEAT PUMP Mode

• This switch is useful when the remote controller is missing. 12. Signal receiver: • It receives signals from the remote controller. • When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a short beep. • Operation start beep-beep • Settings changed beep • Operation stop beeeeep 13. Air outlet selection switch 14. Room temperature sensor: • It senses the air temperature around the unit.

<ARC452A1> 1. Signal transmitter: • It sends signals to the indoor unit. 2. Display: • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with all its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.) 3. FAN setting button: • It selects the airflow rate setting. 4. POWERFUL button: POWERFUL operation 5. ON/OFF button: • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it. 6. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: • It changes the temperature setting. 7. MODE selector button: • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN) 8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9. ECONO button: ECONO operation 10. SWING button: • Adjusting the Airflow Direction 11. WEEKLY/PROGRAM/COPY/BACK/NEXT button: WEEKLY TIMER operation 12. SELECT button: • It changes the ON/OFF TIMER and WEEKLY TIMER settings. 13. OFF TIMER button 14. ON TIMER button 15. TIMER CANCEL button: • It cancels the timer setting. • It cannot be used for the WEEKLY TIMER operation. 16. CLOCK button

AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice. From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.

To start operation 1. Press mode.

and select a operation

• Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence. : AUTO

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The OPERATION lamp lights up.

To stop operation 3. Press

•“ ” disappears from the LCD. • Then OPERATION lamp goes off.

To change the temperature setting 4. Press

AUTO or COOL or HEAT operation Press press

DRY or FAN operation

raise the temperature and lower the temperature.

Set to the temperature you like.

188 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The temperature setting is not variable.

To change the airflow rate setting 5. Press

AUTO or COOL or HEAT or FAN operation

5 levels of airflow rate setting from “ ” to “ “

The airflow rate setting is not variable.

”are available. • Indoor unit quiet operation When the airflow is set to “ ”, the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter. Use this when making the noise quieter.

NOTE Notes on HEAT operation • Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner. • The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of heating operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer. • In heating operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost. • During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit. • A pinging sound may be heard during defrosting operation, which, however does not mean that the air conditioner has failures. Note on COOL operation • This air conditioner cools the room by releasing the heat in the room outside. Therefore, the cooling performance of the air conditioner may be degraded if the outdoor temperature is high. Note on DRY operation • The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and airflow rate, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable. Notes on AUTO operation • In AUTO operation, the system selects an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room and outside temperatures and starts the operation. • The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level. Note on FAN operation • This mode is valid for fan only. Note on airflow rate setting • At smaller airflow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.4 Adjusting the Airflow Direction

FTXS20/25/35/42/50J2V1B Adjusting the Airflow Direction You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To start auto swing Upper and lower airflow direction Press

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The flaps (horizontal blades) will begin to swing.

Right and left airflow direction Press

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The louvers (vertical blades) will begin to swing.

The 3-D airflow direction Press

• “ ” and “ ” are displayed on the LCD. • The flaps and louvers move in turn. • To cancel 3-D airflow, press either again. The flaps or louvers will stop moving.

• The following illustrations show respective airflow directions. Upper/Lower

190 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-D Operation Manual

To set the flaps or louvers at desired position • This function is effective while flaps or louvers are in auto swing mode.

Press and desired position.

when the flaps or louvers have reached the

• In the 3-D airflow, the flaps and louvers move in turn. • “

” disappears from the LCD.

CAUTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flaps and louvers. If you attempt to move the flaps and louvers forcibly with hand when they are swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. In side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

NOTE Note on the angles of the flaps • The flaps swinging range depends on the operation. (See the figure.) Note on 3-D airflow • Using 3-D airflow circulates cold air, which tends to collected at the bottom of the room, and hot air, which tends to collect near the ceiling, throughout the room, preventing are as of cold and hot developing.

In DRY operation or COOL operation COMFORT 8˚ AIRFLOW 15˚ Upper limit 50˚ Lower limit

In HEAT operation Stop operation 30˚ Upper limit 70˚ Lower limit 80˚ COMFORT AIRFLOW In FAN operation

Upper limit 8˚ 80˚ Lower limit

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS60/71GV1B Adjusting the Airflow Direction You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To start auto swing Upper and lower airflow direction Press

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The flaps (horizontal blades) will begin to swing.

Right and left airflow direction Press

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD. • The louvers (vertical blades) will begin to swing.

The 3-D airflow direction Press

• “ ” and “ ” are displayed on the LCD. • The flaps and louvers move in turn. • To cancel 3-D airflow, press either again. The flaps or louvers will stop moving.

• The following illustrations show respective airflow directions. Upper/Lower

192 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3-D Operation Manual

To set the flaps or louvers at desired position • This function is effective while flaps or louvers are in auto swing mode.

Press and desired position.

when the flaps or louvers have reached the

• In the 3-D airflow, the flaps and louvers move in turn. •“

” disappears from the LCD.

CAUTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the angles of the flaps and louvers. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. In side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

In DRY operation or COOL operation COMFORT AIRFLOW 5˚ 15˚ Upper limit 40˚ Lower limit

In HEAT operation Stop operation 15˚ Upper limit 55˚ Lower limit and COMFORT AIRFLOW In FAN operation

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FVXS25/35/50FV1B Adjusting the Airflow Direction You can adjust the airflow direction to increase your comfort.

To adjust the horizontal blade (flap) 1. Press “SWING button

• “ ” is displayed on the LCD and the flaps will begin to swing.

2. When the flap has reached the desired position, press “SWING button ” once more. • The flap will stop moving. • “

” disappears from the LCD.

To adjust the vertical blades (louvers) Hold the knob and move the louver. (You will find a knob on the left-side and the rightside blades.)

Notes on flap and louvers angle • Unless “SWING” is selected, you should set the flap at a near-horizontal angle in HEAT mode and at a upward position in COOL or DRY mode to obtain the best performance.

ATTENTION • When adjusting the flap by hand, turn off the unit, and use the remote controller to restart the unit. • Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

Airflow selection • Make airflow selection according to what suits you.

When setting the airflow selection switch to

• Air conditioner automatically decides the appropriate blowing pattern depending on the operating mode/situation. Operating mode

• When the room has become fully cool, or when one hour has passed since turning on the air conditioner. • At start of operation or other times when the room is not fully cooled.

• So that air does not come into direct contact with people, air is blown upper air outlet, room temperature is equalized.

• At times other than below. (Normal time.)

• Air is blown from the upper and lower air outlets for high speed cooling during COOL mode, and for filling the room with warm air during HEAT mode.

• At start or when air temperature is low.

• So that air does not come into direct contact with people. Air is blown upper air outlet.

• During Dry mode, so that cold air does not come into direct contact with people, air is blown upper air outlet.

When setting the air outlet selection switch to

• Regardless of the operating mode or situation, air blows from the upper air outlet. • Use this switch when you do not want air coming out of the lower air outlet. (While sleeping etc.)

CAUTION • Do not try to adjust the flap by hand. • When adjusting by hand, the mechanism may not operate properly or condensation may drip from air outlets.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS20/25/35/42/50J2V1B COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation COMFORT AIRFLOW operation The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in COOL operation and in the downward direction while in HEAT operation, which will provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with people. COOL operation

INTELLIGENT EYE operation “INTELLIGENT EYE” is the infrared sensor which detects the human movement. If no one is in the room for more than 20 minutes, the operation automatically changes to energy saving operation. The INTELLIGENT EYE sensor according to the following situations. A person is detected in area 1.

People are detected in both areas.

No people are detected in the areas.

Use the INTELLIGENT EYE Operation in combination with the COMFORT AIRFLOW Operation.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A person is detected in area 2.

The air conditioner will go into energy-saving mode after 20 minutes. *The wind direction may differ from the illustrated direction depending on the actions and movements of the people in the areas.

To start operation Press mode.

and select the desired

• Each time the is pressed a different setting option is displayed on the LCD. • By selecting “ ” from the following icons, the air conditioner will be in COMFORT AIRFLOW operation combined with INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

COMFORT AIRFLOW INTELLIGENT EYE Combination

• When the flaps (horizontal blades) are swinging, the operating as above will stop movement of them. • The INTELLIGENT EYE lamp lights up. • The lamp will be lit while human movements are detected.

To cancel operation Press LCD. Display

and select “blank” on the

COMFORT AIRFLOW The flaps will adjust the airflow direction upward while cooling, and adjust the airflow direction downward while heating.

INTELLIGENT EYE The sensors will detect the movement of people in the sensing areas and the louvers will adjust the airflow direction to an area where people are not present. When there are no people in the sensing areas, the air conditioner will go into energy-saving mode.

INTELLIGENT EYE The air conditioner will be in COMFORT AIRFLOW operation combined with INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation NOTE Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation • The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room. • POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time. • Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be canceled. Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE operation • Application range is as follows.

Vertical angle 90˚ (Side view)

Horizontal angle 110˚ (Top view)

• While the air conditioner is in INTELLIGENT EYE operation, the louvers will adjust the airflow direction if there are people in the sensing areas of the INTELLIGENT EYE so that the leftward or rightward airflow will not be directed to the people. If no people are detected in either area 1 or 2 in 20 minutes, the air conditioner will go into energy-saving mode with the set temperature shifted by 2˚C. The air conditioner may go into energy-saving operation even if there are people in the areas. This may occur depending on the clothes the people are wearing if there are no movements of the people in the areas. • The airflow direction from the louvers will be leftward if there are people in both areas 1 and 2 or if there is a person right in front of the sensors because the sensors on the both sides will detect the person. • Due to the position of the sensor, people might be exposed to the airflow of the indoor unit if they are close to the front side of the indoor unit. If there are people close to the front side of the indoor unit or in both areas, it is recommended to use the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions simultaneously. When both of them are in use, the air conditioner will not direct the airflow towards the people. • Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range) • Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc. • The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby. • INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during POWERFUL operation. • NIGHT SET mode will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

NOTE Note on combination of COMFORT AIRFLOW operation and INTELLIGENT EYE operation • The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be canceled. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE functions combined. The flaps adjust the airflow direction upward (while in cooling operation) and downward (while in heating operation), during which the sensors of the INTELLIGENT EYE are working to detect the movement of people. When the sensors detect people, the louvers will direct the airflow in such way that it will not be blown directly on them. If there are no people, the air conditioner will go into energy-saving operation after 20 minutes.

INTELLIGENT EYE operation is useful for energy saving Energy saving operation • If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes, the energy saving operation will start. • This operation changes the temperature –2˚C in HEAT / +2˚C in COOL / +2˚C in DRY operation from set temperature. • This operation decreases the airflow rate slightly in FAN operation only.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS60/71GV1B COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation COMFORT AIRFLOW operation The flow of air will be in the upward direction while in COOL operation and in the downward direction while in HEAT operation, which will provide a comfortable wind that will not come in direct contact with people.

INTELLIGENT EYE operation “INTELLIGENT EYE” is the infrared sensor which detects the human movement. If nobody in the room for more than 20 minutes, the operation automatically changes to energy saving operation.

When somebody in the room Normal operation • The air conditioner is in normal operation while the sensor is detecting the movement of people. • The INTELLIGENT EYE lamp lights up.

When nobody in the room 20 minutes after, start energy saving operation. • The set temperature is shifted in ±2˚C steps. • The INTELLIGENT EYE lamp is goes off.

Somebody back in the room Back to normal operation. • The air conditioner will return to normal operation when the sensor detects the movement of people again. • The INTELLIGENT EYE lamp lights up again.

To combine COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE operation The air conditioner can go into operation with the COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE operation combined.

200 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To start operation Press mode.

and select the desired

COMFORT AIRFLOW INTELLIGENT EYE Combination

To cancel operation Press LCD.

and select “blank” on the

INTELLIGENT EYE operation is useful for energy saving Energy saving operation • If no presence detected in the room for 20 minutes, the energy saving operation will start. • This operation changes the temperature –2˚C in HEAT / +2˚C in COOL / +2˚C in DRY operation from set temperature. • This operation decreases the airflow rate slightly in FAN operation only.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

COMFORT AIRFLOW and INTELLIGENT EYE Operation NOTE Notes on COMFORT AIRFLOW operation • The flap position will change, preventing air from blowing directly on the occupants of the room. • POWERFUL operation and COMFORT AIRFLOW operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be canceled. Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE operation • Application range is as follows.

Vertical angle 90˚ (Side view)

Horizontal angle 110˚ (Top view)

• Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range) • Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc. • The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of mirrors as passersby. • INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during POWERFUL operation. • NIGHT SET mode will not go on during use of INTELLIGENT EYE operation. Note on combination of COMFORT AIRFLOW operation and INTELLIGENT EYE operation • The airflow rate will be set to AUTO. If the upper and lower airflow direction is selected, the COMFORT AIRFLOW operation will be canceled. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.

202 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.6 POWERFUL Operation

POWERFUL Operation POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect in any operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.

To start POWERFUL operation 1. Press

• POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates again with the previous settings which were used before POWERFUL operation. •“

” is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel POWERFUL operation 2. Press •“

” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE Notes on POWERFUL operation • When using POWERFUL operation, there are some functions which are not available. • POWERFUL operation cannot be used together with ECONO, COMFORT AIRFLOW or OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • POWERFUL operation can only be set when the unit is running. • POWERFUL operation will not increase the capacity of the air conditioner if the air conditioner is already in operation with its maximum capacity demonstrated. • In COOL, HEAT and AUTO mode To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit is increased and the airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting. The temperature and airflow settings are not variable. • In DRY operation The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5˚C and the airflow rate is slightly increased. • In FAN operation The airflow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

. ” is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 2. Press •“

again. ” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE Notes on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation • If using a multi system, the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will work only when this function is set on all operated indoor units. • This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO operation. (This is not available in FAN and DRY operation.) • POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • Even the operation is stopped using the remote controller or the indoor unit ON/OFF switch when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, “ ” will remain on the remote controller display. • OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation will drop neither the frequency nor fan speed if the frequency and fan speed have been already dropped low enough.

204 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.8 ECONO Operation

To start ECONO operation 1. Press •“

” disappears from the LCD.

Running current and power consumption Normal operation

Maximum during normal operation Maximum during ECONO operation

ECONO operation Time From start up until set temperature is reached

• This diagram is a representation for illustrative purposes only. * The maximum running current and power consumption of the air conditioner in ECONO operation vary with the connecting outdoor unit.

NOTE Notes on ECONO operation • ECONO operation can only be set when the unit is running. • ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power consumption of the outdoor unit (operating frequency). • ECONO operation functions in AUTO, COOL, DRY and HEAT operation. • POWERFUL and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • If the level of power consumption is already low, ECONO operation will not drop the power consumption.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.9 OFF TIMER Operation

OFF TIMER Operation Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.

To use OFF TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and setting time are displayed on the LCD.

until the time setting reaches

the point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.

• The TIMER lamp lights up.

To cancel the OFF TIMER Operation 4. Press •“

. ” and setting time disappear from the LCD.

• “ ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

NOTE Notes on TIMER operation • When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed. • Once you set ON/OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. The memory is canceled when remote controller batteries are replaced. • When operating the unit via the ON/OFF TIMER, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the user. (Maximum approx. 10 minutes) NIGHT SET mode When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5˚C up in COOL, 2.0˚C down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

206 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ON TIMER Operation To use ON TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time.

” and setting time are displayed on the LCD.

until the time setting reaches

the point you like. • Each pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.

• The TIMER lamp lights up.

To cancel ON TIMER operation 4. Press •“

” and setting time disappear from the LCD.

• “ ” and day of the week are displayed on the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER • A sample setting for combining the 2 timers is shown below.

(Example) Present time: 23:00 (The unit operating) OFF TIMER at 0:00 ON TIMER at 14:00

NOTE In the following cases, set the timer again. • After a breaker has turned off. • After a power failure. • After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.11 WEEKLY TIMER Operation

WEEKLY TIMER Operation Up to 4 timer settings can be saved for each day of the week. It is convenient if the WEEKLY TIMER is set according to the family’s life style.

Using in these cases of WEEKLY TIMER An example of WEEKLY TIMER settings is shown below.

Example: The same timer settings are made for the week from Monday through Friday while different timer settings are made for the weekend. [Monday] Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. Program 1

[Tuesday] Use the copy mode to make settings for Tuesday to Friday, because these to settings are the same as those for Monday. Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 [Friday] Program 1

[Saturday] No timer settings [Sunday] Make timer settings up to programs 1-4. Program 1

• Up to 4 reservations per day and 28 reservations per week can be set in the WEEKLY TIMER. The effective use of the copy mode ensures ease of making reservations. • The use of ON-ON-ON-ON settings, for example, makes it possible to schedule operating mode and set temperature changes. Furthermore, by using OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF settings, only the turnoff time of each day can be set. This will turn off the air conditioner automatically if the user forgets to turn it off.

WEEKLY TIMER Operation To use WEEKLY TIMER operation Setting mode • Make sure the day of the week and time are set. If not, set the day of the week and time.

• The day of the week and the reservation number of the current day will be displayed. • 1 to 4 settings can be made per day.

to select the desired day of the

week and reservation number. • Pressing the

changes the reservation number and

the day of the week.

• The day of the week and reservation number will be set. •“

to select the desired mode.

” setting in sequence. blank

• In case the reservation has already been set, selecting “blank” deletes the reservation. • Go to step 9 if “blank” is selected.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

to select the desired time.

• The time can be set between 0:00 and 23:50 in 10 minute intervals. • To return to the ON/OFF TIMER mode setting, press . • Go to step 9 when setting the OFF TIMER.

” and the temperature blink.

to select the desired

temperature. • The temperature can be set between 10˚C and 32˚C. Cooling: The unit operates at 18˚C even if it is set at 10 to 17˚C. Heating: The unit operates at 30˚C even if it is set at 31 to 32˚C. • To return to the time setting, press . • The set temperature is only displayed when the mode setting is on.

• The temperature will be set and go to the next reservation setting. • To continue further settings, repeat the procedure from step 4.

to complete the setting.

• Be sure to direct the remote controller toward the indoor unit and check for a receiving tone and flashing the OPERATION lamp. •“ ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated. • The TIMER lamp lights up. • A reservation made once can be easily copied and the same settings used for another day of the week. Refer to copy mode.

210 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTE Notes on WEEKLY TIMER operation • Do not forget to set the clock on the remote control first. • The day of the week, ON/OFF TIMER mode, time and set temperature (only for ON TIMER mode) can be set with WEEKLY TIMER. Other settings for ON TIMER are based on the settings just before the operation. • Both WEEKLY TIMER and ON/OFF TIMER operation cannot be used at the same time. The ON/OFF TIMER operation has priority if it is set while WEEKLY TIMER is still active. The WEEKLY TIMER will go into standby state, and “ ” will disappear from the LCD. When ON/OFF TIMER is up, the WEEKLY TIMER will automatically become active. • Only the time and set temperature with the weekly timer are sent with the

Set the weekly timer only after setting the operation mode, the fan strength, and the fan direction ahead of time. • Shutting the breaker off, power failure, and other similar events will render operation of the indoor unit’s internal clock inaccurate. Reset the clock. • The

can be used only for the time and temperature settings.

It cannot be used to go back to the reservation number.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copy mode • A reservation made once can be copied another day of the week. The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied.

COPY Program 1 [Tuesday] to [Friday]

. to confirm the day of the week

to be copied. 3. Press

to activate copy mode.

• The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied.

to select the destination day of

• The reservation will be copied to the selected day of the week. The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied. • To continue copying the settings to other days of the week, repeat step 4 and step 5.

to complete the setting.

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated.

NOTE Note on COPY MODE • The entire reservation of the source day of the week is copied in the copy mode. In the case of making a reservation change for any day of the week individually after copying the content of weekly reservations, press steps of setting mode.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

and change the settings in the

Confirming a reservation • The reservation can be confirmed.

• The day of the week and the reservation number of current day will be displayed.

to select the day of the week and

the reservation number to be confirmed. • Pressing the

displays the reservation details.

• To change the confirmed reserved settings, select the reservation number and press . The mode is switched to setting mode. Go to setting mode step 4.

to exit confirming mode.

•“ ” is displayed on the LCD and WEEKLY TIMER operation is activated. • The TIMER lamp lights up.

•“ ” disappears from the LCD. • The TIMER lamp goes off. • To reactivate the WEEKLY TIMER operation, press the • If a reservation deactivated with will be used.

214 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

is activated once again, the last reservation mode

WEEKLY TIMER Operation To delete reservations The individual reservation • Refer to setting mode. When selecting desired mode at step 4 in setting mode, select “blank”. The reservation will be deleted.

The reservations for each day of the week • This function can be used for deleting reservations for each day of the week. • It can be used while confirming or setting reservations.

6. Select the day of the week to be canceled with

• The reservation of the selected day of the week will be deleted.

All reservations 8. Hold display.

for 5 seconds while normal

• Be sure to direct the remote control toward the main unit and check for a receiving tone. • This operation is not effective on the setting display of WEEKLY TIMER. • All reservations will be deleted.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.2.12 Note for Multi System

Note for Multi System This system has one outdoor unit connected to multiple indoor units.

Selecting the operation mode

1. With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present. When more than 1 indoor unit is operating, priority is given to the first unit that was turned on. In this case, set the units that are turned on later to the same operation mode as the first unit. Otherwise, they will enter the standby state, and the OPERATION lamp will flash: this does not indicate malfunction.

NOTE Notes on operation mode for multi system • COOL, DRY and FAN operation may be used at the same time. • AUTO operation automatically selects COOL operation or HEAT operation based on the room temperature. Therefore, AUTO operation is available when selecting the same operation mode as that of the room with the first unit to be turned on.

CAUTION • Normally, the operation mode in the room where the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep this in mind. If the operation mode of the first room is FAN operation, then using HEAT operation in any room after this will give priority to HEAT operation. In this situation, the air conditioner running in FAN operation will go on standby, and the OPERATION lamp will flash.

2. With the priority room setting active. See “Priority room setting” on the next page.

NIGHT QUIET mode (Available only for COOL operation) NIGHT QUIET mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. NIGHT QUIET mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the night time hours to prevent annoyance to neighbors. • The NIGHT QUIET mode is activated when the temperature drops 5˚C or more below the highest temperature recorded that day. Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than 5˚C, this function will not be activated. • NIGHT QUIET mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

216 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Note for Multi System OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 1. With the priority room setting present but inactive or not present. When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation using their remote controllers. When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units using their remote controller. However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other rooms. We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

2. With the priority room setting active. See “Priority room setting”.

COOL/HEAT mode lock (Available only for heat pump models) The COOL/HEAT mode lock requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your authorized dealer for assistance. The COOL/HEAT mode lock sets the unit forcibly to either COOL or HEAT operation. This function is convenient when you wish to set all indoor units connected to the multi system to the same operation mode.

NOTE • The COOL/HEAT mode lock cannot be activated together with the priority room setting.

Priority room setting The priority room setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. The room designated as the priority room takes priority in the following situations;

1. Operation mode priority. As the operation mode of the priority room takes precedence, the user can select a different operation mode from other rooms. * Room A is the priority room in the examples. 〈Example〉 When COOL operation is selected in room A while operating the following modes in room B, C and D: Status of room B, C and D when the unit Operation mode in in room A is in COOL operation room B, C and D Current operation mode maintained COOL or DRY or FAN The unit enters standby mode. Operation resumes when HEAT the room A unit stops operating. If the unit is set to COOL operation, it continues. If set to HEAT operation, it enters standby mode. Operation AUTO resumes when the room A unit stops operating.

2. Priority when POWERFUL operation is used. * Room A is the priority room in the examples. 〈Example〉 The indoor units in rooms A, B, C and D are all operating. If the unit in room A enters POWERFUL operation, operation capacity will be concentrated in room A. In such a case, the cooling (heating) efficiency of the units in rooms B, C and D may be slightly reduced.

3. Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. * Room A is the priority room in the examples. 〈Example〉 Just by setting the unit in room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. You don’t have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FLXS, FDXS Series - ARC433B67, B69

Adjusting the Airflow Direction

Model Series Read Before Operation Remote Controller Operation

HOME LEAVE Operation

Note for Multi System

: The illustrations are for FLXS series as representative.

< ARC433B67, B68 > 1. Signal transmitter: • It sends signals to the indoor unit. 2. Display: • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with all its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.) 3. HOME LEAVE button: HOME LEAVE operation 4. POWERFUL button: POWERFUL operation 5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: • It changes the temperature setting. 6. ON/OFF button: • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7. MODE selector button: • It selects the operation mode. (AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN) 8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 9. FAN setting button: • It selects the air flow rate setting. 10. SWING button 11. ON TIMER button 12. OFF TIMER button 13. TIMER Setting button: • It changes the time setting. 14. TIMER CANCEL button: • It cancels the timer setting. 15. CLOCK button 16. RESET button: • Restart the unit if it freezes. • Use a thin object to push.

< ARC433B69, B76 > 1. Signal transmitter: • It sends signals to the indoor unit. 2. Display: • It displays the current settings. (In this illustration, each section is shown with all its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.) 3. HOME LEAVE button: HOME LEAVE operation 4. POWERFUL button: POWERFUL operation 5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons: • It changes the temperature setting. 6. ON/OFF button: • Press this button once to start operation. Press once again to stop it.

2.3.3 AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation

AUTO · DRY · COOL · HEAT · FAN Operation The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your choice. From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the same operation mode.

To start operation 1. Press “MODE selector button” and select a operation mode. • Each pressing of the button advances the mode setting in sequence.

To stop operation 3. Press “ON/OFF button” again. • Then OPERATION lamp goes off.

To change the temperature setting 4. Press “TEMPERATURE adjustment button”. DRY or FAN mode

AUTO or COOL or HEAT mode Press “ “

The temperature setting is not variable.

” to raise the temperature and press

” to lower the temperature.

Set to the temperature you like.

C Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AUTO or COOL or HEAT or FAN mode Five levels of air flow rate setting from “ plus “

The air flow rate setting is not variable.

• Indoor unit quiet operation When the air flow is set to “ ”, the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter. Use this when making the noise quieter. The unit might lose capacity when the air flow rate is set to a weak level.

NOTE Note on HEAT operation • Since this air conditioner heats the room by taking heat from outdoor air to indoors, the heating capacity becomes smaller in lower outdoor temperatures. If the heating effect is insufficient, it is recommended to use another heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner. • The heat pump system heats the room by circulating hot air around all parts of the room. After the start of heating operation, it takes some time before the room gets warmer. • In heating operation, frost may occur on the outdoor unit and lower the heating capacity. In that case, the system switches into defrosting operation to take away the frost. • During defrosting operation, hot air does not flow out of indoor unit. Note on COOL operation • This air conditioner cools the room by blowing the hot air in the room outside, so if the outside temperature is high, performance drops. Note on DRY operation • The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and fan strength, so manual adjustment of these functions is unavailable. Note on AUTO operation • In AUTO operation, the system selects a temperature setting and an appropriate operation mode (COOL or HEAT) based on the room temperature at the start of the operation. • The system automatically reselects setting at a regular interval to bring the room temperature to user-setting level. • If you do not like AUTO operation, you can manually select the operation mode and setting you like. Note on air flow rate setting • At smaller air flow rates, the cooling (heating) effect is also smaller.

222 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.3.4 Adjusting the Airflow Direction

FLXS25/35/50/60BAVMB Adjusting the Airflow Direction You can adjust the air flow direction to increase your comfort.

To adjust the horizontal blade (flap) 1. Press “SWING button”. •“ ” is displayed on the LCD and the flaps will begin to swing.

2. When the flaps have reached the desired position, press “SWING button” once more. • The flap will stop moving. •“

” disappears from the LCD.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To adjust the vertical blades (louvers) • When adjusting the louver, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully. Hold the knob and move the louvers. (You will find a knob on the left side and the right side blades.)

Notes on flap and louvers angles. • Unless [SWING] is selected, you should set the flap at a near- horizontal angle in COOL or DRY mode to obtain the best performance. • In COOL or DRY mode, if the flap is fixed at a downward position, the flap automatically moves in about 60 minutes to prevent condensation on it. ATTENTION • Always use a remote controller to adjust the flap angle. If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is swinging, the mechanism may be broken. • Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high speed.

224 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.3.5 POWERFUL Operation

POWERFUL Operation POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling (heating) effect in any operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.

To start POWERFUL operation 1. Press “POWERFUL button”. • POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes. Then the system automatically operates again with the settings which were used before POWERFUL operation. • When using POWERFUL operation, there are some functions which are not available. • “ ” is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel POWERFUL operation 2. Press “POWERFUL button” again. • “

” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE Notes on POWERFUL operation • In COOL and HEAT mode To maximize the cooling (heating) effect, the capacity of outdoor unit must be increased and the air flow rate be fixed to the maximum setting. The temperature and air flow settings are not variable. • In DRY mode The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5˚C and the air flow rate is slightly increased. • In FAN mode The air flow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation 2. Press “QUIET button” again. • “

” disappears from the LCD.

NOTE Note on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation • This function is available in COOL, HEAT, and AUTO modes. (This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.) • POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the same time. Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last. • If operation is stopped using the remote controller or the main unit ON/OFF switch when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, “ ” will remain on the remote controller display.

226 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.3.7 HOME LEAVE Operation

HOME LEAVE Operation HOME LEAVE operation is a function which allows you to record your preferred temperature and air flow rate settings.

To start HOME LEAVE operation 1. Press “HOME LEAVE button” . • The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up.

To cancel HOME LEAVE operation

2. Press “HOME LEAVE button” again. • The HOME LEAVE lamp goes off.

Before using HOME LEAVE operation. To set the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation When using HOME LEAVE operation for the first time, please set the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation. Record your preferred temperature and air flow rate. Initial setting temperature

1. Press “HOME LEAVE button”. Make sure “ ” is displayed in the remote controller display. 2. Adjust the set temperature with “ ” or “ ” as you like. 3. Adjust the air flow rate with “FAN” setting button as you like. Home leave operation will run with these settings the next time you use the unit. To change the recorded information, repeat steps 1 – 3.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

What’s the HOME LEAVE operation? Is there a set temperature and air flow rate which is most comfortable, a set temperature and air flow rate which you use the most? HOME LEAVE operation is a function that allows you to record your favorite set temperature and air flow rate. You can start your favorite operation mode simply by pressing the HOME LEAVE button on the remote controller. This function is convenient in the following situations.

Useful in these cases 1.Use as an energy-saving mode. Set the temperature 2-3˚C higher (cooling) or lower (heating) than normal. Setting the fan strength to the lowest setting allows the unit to be used in energy-saving mode. Also convenient for use while you are out or sleeping. • Every day before you leave the house...

When you go out, push the “HOME LEAVE Operation” button, and the air conditioner will adjust capacity to reach the preset temperature for HOME LEAVE Operation.

When you return, you will be welcomed by a comfortably air conditioned room.

Push the “HOME LEAVE Operation” button again, and the air conditioner will adjust capacity to the set temperature for normal operation.

The unit will maintain the temperature in the room at a comfortable level while you sleep.

When you enter the living room in the morning, the temperature will be just right. Disengaging HOME LEAVE Operation will return the temperature to that set for normal operation. Even the coldest winters will pose no problem!

Set the unit to HOME LEAVE Operation before leaving the living room when going to bed.

2.Use as a favorite mode. Once you record the temperature and air flow rate settings you most often use, you can retrieve them by pressing HOME LEAVE button. You do not have to go through troublesome remote control operations.

NOTE • Once the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation are set, those settings will be used whenever HOME LEAVE operation is used in the future. To change these settings, please refer to the “Before using HOME LEAVE operation” section above. • HOME LEAVE operation is only available in COOL and HEAT mode. Cannot be used in AUTO, DRY, and FAN mode. • HOME LEAVE operation runs in accordance with the previous operation mode (COOL or HEAT) before using HOME LEAVE operation. • HOME LEAVE operation and POWERFUL operation cannot be used at the same time. Last button that was pressed has priority. • The operation mode cannot be changed while HOME LEAVE operation is being used. • When operation is shut off during HOME LEAVE operation, using the remote controller or the indoor unit ON/OFF switch, “ ” will remain on the remote controller display.

228 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TIMER Operation Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination. ON

To use OFF TIMER operation

• Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time. VE

1. Press “OFF TIMER button”. is displayed. blinks.

2. Press “TIMER Setting button” until the time setting reaches the point you like. • Every pressing of either button increases or decreases the time setting by 10 minutes. Holding down either button changes the setting rapidly.

3. Press “OFF TIMER button” again. • The TIMER lamp lights up.

To cancel the OFF TIMER operation 4. Press “CANCEL button”. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

NOTE • When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed. • Once you set ON, OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. (The memory is canceled when remote controller batteries are replaced.) • When operating the unit via the ON/OFF Timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time entered by the user. (Maximum approx. 10 minutes) NIGHT SET MODE When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5˚C up in COOL, 2.0˚C down in HEAT) to prevent excessive cooling (heating) for your pleasant sleep.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To use ON TIMER operation • Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the clock to the present time

1. Press “ON TIMER button”. is displayed.

3. Press “ON TIMER button” again. • The TIMER lamp lights up.

To cancel ON TIMER operation 4. Press “CANCEL button”. • The TIMER lamp goes off.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER • A sample setting for combining the two timers is shown below.

(Example) Present time: 11:00 p.m. (The unit operating) OFF TIMER at 0:00 a.m. ON TIMER at 7:00 a.m.

ATTENTION In the following cases, set the timer again. • After a breaker has turned OFF. • After a power failure. • After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

2.3.9 Note for Multi System

Note for Multi System << What is a “Multi System”? >> This system has one outdoor unit connected to multiple indoor units.

Selecting the Operation Mode

1. With the Priority Room Setting present but inactive or not present. When more than one indoor unit is operating, priority is given to the first unit that was turned on. In this case, set the units that are turned on later to the same operation mode (*1) as the first unit.

Otherwise, they will enter the Standby Mode, and the operation lamp will flash; this does not indicate malfunction. (*1) • COOL, DRY and FAN mode may be used at the same time. • AUTO mode automatically selects COOL mode or HEAT mode based on the room temperature. Therefore, AUTO mode is available when selecting the same operation mode as that of the room with the first unit to be turned on. <CAUTION> Normally, the operation mode in the room where the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep this in mind. If the operation mode of the first room is FAN Mode, then using Heating Mode in any room after this will give priority to heating. In this situation, the air conditioner running in FAN Mode will go on standby, and the operation lamp will flash.

2. With the Priority Room Setting active. See “Priority Room Setting” on the next page.

NIGHT QUIET Mode (Available only for cooling operation) NIGHT QUIET Mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the night time hours to prevent annoyance to neighbors. • The NIGHT QUIET Mode is activated when the temperature drops 5°C or more below the highest temperature recorded that day. Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than 5°C, this function will not be activated. • NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation 1. With the Priority Room Setting present but inactive or not present. When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation using their remote controllers. When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units using their remote controller. However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other rooms. We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

2. With the Priority Room Setting active. See “Priority Room Setting” on the next page.

Cooling / Heating Mode Lock (Available only for heat pump models) The Cooling / Heating Mode Lock requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. The Cooling / Heating Mode Lock sets the unit forcibly to either Cooling or Heating Mode. This functions convenient when you wish to set all indoor units connected to the Multi system to the same operation mode.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Priority Room Setting The Priority Room Setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer or dealer for assistance. The room designated as the Priority Room takes priority in the following situations;

1. Operation Mode Priority. As the operation mode of the Priority Room takes precedence, the user can select a different operation mode from other rooms. <Example> * Room A is the Priority Room in the examples. When COOL mode is selected in Room A while operating the following modes in Room B,C and D:

Operation mode in Room B, C and D COOL or DRY or FAN HEAT AUTO Status of Room B, C and D when the unit in Room A is in COOL mode Current operation mode maintained The unit enters Standby Mode. Operation resumes when the Room A unit stops operating. If the unit is set to COOL mode, operation continues. If set to HEAT mode, it enters Standby Mode. Operation resumes when the Room A unit stops operating.

2. Priority when POWERFUL operation is used. <Example> * Room A is the Priority Room in the examples. The indoor units in Rooms A,B,C and D are all operating. If the unit in Room A enters POWERFUL operation, operation capacity will be concentrated in Room A. In such a case, the cooling (heating) efficiency of the units in Rooms B,C and D may be slightly reduced.

3. Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. <Example> * Room A is the Priority Room in the examples. Just by setting the unit in Room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation. You don’t have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.

232 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. SA Indoor Unit 3.1

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

THANK YOU FOR PURCHASING THIS CONTROLLER. READ THE MANUAL ATTENTIVELY BEFORE USING THE INSTALLATION. AFTER READING THE MANUAL, STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE FOR FUTURE USE. Before initial operation, contact your dealer to obtain all details concerning your air conditioning installation.

WARNING - Never let the remote controller get wet, this may cause an electric shock or fire. - Never press the buttons of the remote controller with a hard, pointed object. The remote controller may be damaged. - Never inspect or service the remote controller yourself, ask a qualified service person to do this.

1. Features and functions1 2. Name and function of switches and icons 2 3. Setting up the controller4

1. Features and functions The BRC1D528 is a state of the art remote controller that offers full control over your installation. 1 BASIC REMOTE CONTROLLER The basic remote controller functions are: • ON/OFF, • operation mode change-over, • temperature adjustment, • air volume adjustment • air flow direction adjustment. 2 CLOCK FUNCTION The clock functions are: • 24 hours real time clock, • day of the week indicator. 3 SCHEDULE TIMER FUNCTION The schedule timer functions are: • a maximum of 5 actions can be programmed for each day of the week (totalling 35 actions), • schedule timer can be enabled/disabled at any time, • linked to a set temperature or a LIMIT operation or an OFF operation, • "last command" overrules previous command until next scheduled command.

4. Description of the operation modes5

Limit operation provides thermostat control within the range of the set minimum and maximum temperature. The minimum temperature setting will trigger heating, the maximum temperature setting will trigger cooling.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LEAVE HOME The leave home function prevents the room temperature from dropping when the occupants are out for a longer period. If the room temperature drops below 10°C, heating is started automatically. As soon as 15°C is reached, the controller returns to its original status. 6

2. Name and function of switches and icons (Refer to figure 1) 1 ON/OFF BUTTON Press the ON/OFF button to start or stop the system. 2 OPERATION LAMP The operation lamp lights up during operation or blinks if a malfunction occurs. 3 OPERATION MODE ICON These icons indicate the current operation mode (FAN, DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING).

VENTILATION MODE ICON These icons indicate the current ventilation mode (HRV only) (AUTOMATIC, HEAT EXCHANGE, BYPASS). 5

AIR CLEANING ICON This icon indicates that the air cleaning unit (option) is operational. 7 LEAVE HOME ICON The leave home icon shows the status of the leave home function.

BUTTON PERMISSION LEVEL Three hierarchical permission levels can be set to limit the user action.

VENTILATION ICON The ventilation icon appears when the ventilation is adjusted with the ventilation amount button (HRV only). Simultaneously, the ventilation amount is indicated by the fan speed icon (see 22).

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

236 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ON Leave home is enabled

FLASHING Leave home is active

OFF Leave home is disabled

8 EXTERNAL CONTROL ICON This icon indicates that another controller with higher priority is controlling or disabling your installation. 9

CHANGE-OVER UNDER CENTRALISED CONTROL ICON This icon indicates that the change-over of the installation is under centralised control assigned to another indoor unit or optional cool/heat selector connected to the outdoor unit (= master remote controller). 10

DAY OF THE WEEK INDICATOR The day of the week indicator shows the current week day (or the set day when reading or programming the schedule timer). 11 CLOCK DISPLAY The clock display indicates the current time (or the action time when reading or programming the schedule timer).

12 MAXTEMPERATURE IMUM SET The maximum set temperature indicates the maximum set temperature when in limit operation.

13 MINIMUM SET TEMPERATURE The minimum set temperature indicates the minimum set temperature when in limit operation.

14 SCHEDULE TIMER ICON This icon indicates that the schedule timer is enabled. 15 ACTION ICONS These icons indicate the actions for each day of the schedule timer. 16 OFF ICON This icon indicates that the OFF action is selected when programming the schedule timer.

NOT AVAILABLE is displayed whenever a non-installed option is addressed or a function is not available.

FAN SPEED ICON This icon indicates the set fan speed. 23 DEFROST/HOTSTART MODE ICON This icon indicates that the defrost/hotstart mode is active. 24 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON This icon indicates the air filter must be cleaned. Refer to the manual of the indoor unit. 25 ELEMENT CLEANING TIME ICON This icon indicates the element must be cleaned ( only).

17 INSPECTION REQUIRED and These icons indicate that inspection is required. Consult your installer.

26 VENTILATION MODE BUTTON The ventilation mode button operates the to the manual for more details.

18 SET TEMPERATURE DISPLAY This indicates the current set temperature of the installation (not shown in LIMIT operation or in FAN or DRY mode).

This button sets the ventilation amount; refer to the manual for more details.

19 SETTING Not used, for service purposes only. 20 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ICON This icon indicates the air flow direction (only for installations with motorised air flow ßaps).

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VENTILATION AMOUNT BUTTON INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON Not used, for service purposes only. 29 PROGRAMMING BUTTON This button is a multi-purpose button. Depending on the previous manipulations of the user, the programming button can have various functions.

30 SCHEDULE TIMER BUTTON This button enables or disables the schedule timer. 31 TIME ADJUST BUTTON These buttons are used to adjust the clock or, when in programming mode, to adjust the programmed action time. Both buttons have an auto-repeat function. 32

TEMPERATURE ADJUST BUTTONS These buttons are used to adjust the current setpoint or, when in programming mode, to adjust the programmed setpoint temperature (step = 1°C). Both buttons are also used to adjust the day of the week. 33

OPERATION CHANGE/MIN-MIX BUTTON This button is a multi-purpose button. Depending on the previous manipulations of the user, it can have following functions: 1 select the operation mode of the installation (FAN, DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING) 2 toggle between minimum temperature and maximum temperature when in limit operation 34

SETPOINT/LIMIT BUTTON This button toggles between setpoint, limit operation or (programming mode only). 35 FAN SPEED BUTTON This button toggles between L (Low), H (High), HH (very High), (Automatic). 36

AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON This button enables to adjust the air flow direction.

AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON RESET BUTTON This button is used to reset the air filter cleaning time icon.

3. Setting up the controller After initial installation, the user can set the clock and day of the week. The controller is equipped with a schedule timer that enables the user to operate the installation automatically; setting the clock and day of the week is required to be able to use the schedule timer. 1 CLOCK SETTING FUNCTION Hold down the button for 5 seconds. The clock read-out and the day of week indicator will blink, both can now be adjusted. Use the & buttons to adjust the clock. Each time pressing the time adjust button will in/decrease the time by 1 minute. Keeping the or button pressed will in/decrease the time by 10 minutes. Use the & buttons to adjust the day of the week. Each time pressing the or buttons will display the next or previous day. Press the button to confirm the current set time and day of the week. If the controller, with blinking clock and day of week read-out, is left untouched for 5 minutes, the clock and day of the week will return to their previous settings; the clock setting function is no longer active. 2 SETTING UP THE SCHEDULE TIMER To set up the schedule timer, refer to chapter 6. "Programming the schedule timer" on page 10.

4. Description of the operation modes 1 FAN ONLY OPERATION In this mode, air only circulates without heating or cooling. 2

DRY OPERATION In this mode, the air humidity will be lowered with a minimal temperature decrease.

Defrost (heat pump types only) In heating operation, freezing of the outdoor heat exchanger may occur. If so, the heating capacity of the system lowers and the system goes into defrost operation. The indoor unit fan stops and is displayed. After maximum 10 minutes of defrost operation, the system returns to heating operation again.

The temperature and fan speed are controlled automatically and cannot be controlled by the remote controller. Dry operation will not function if the room temperature is too low.

6 LIMIT OPERATION & Limit operation is an additional mode that enables to keep the room temperature within certain limits. The & icons are displayed to confirm the activation of the limit operation.

7 LEAVE HOME LEAVE HOME is a feature that enables to keep the room temperature above 10°C when the occupants are out. This function will switch on heating if the installation is switched off.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION In this mode, the controller will automatically switch between heating and cooling as required by the setpoint or limit temperature. 4

COOLING OPERATION In this mode, cooling will be activated as required by the setpoint or limit temperature.

5. Operation Manual operation

5 HEATING OPERATION In this mode, heating will be activated as required by the setpoint or limit temperature. Hot start (heat pump types only) At the start of a heating operation, the indoor fan is stopped until a certain indoor heat exchanger temperature is reached and is displayed. This prevents cold air from leaving the indoor unit.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In manual operation, the user decides about the settings of the installation. The last setting remains active until the user changes it. As the controller can be implemented for a wide variety of installations and features, it might occur that you select a function that is not available on your installation; if this is the case, the message will appear.

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

button to select the desired operation

AUTOMATIC OPERATION User adjustable parameters: • Setpoint temperature, use the buttons,

Fan only operation Dry operation

Air flow direction adjust, use the

COOLING OPERATION Press the button to toggle between limit operation and the operations listed above. In limit operation, use the button to select minimum and maximum temperature settings. Use the or buttons to adjust the minimum and maximum temperature settings. 1 FAN ONLY OPERATION User adjustable parameters: • •

Fan speed, use the button, Air flow direction adjust, use the

Air flow direction adjust, use the

ADDITIONAL FEATURES OF THE CONTROLLER 1 LEAVE HOME Press the and buttons simultaneously to enable the LEAVE HOME function. KEEP IN MIND THAT THE BUTTON MUST BE OFF TO GUARANTEE TRIGGERING OF THE LEAVE HOME FUNCTION. 2

Adjusting the air flow direction

Use the button to adjust the air flow direction. Press the button to switch between fixed or variable air flow direction. Use the icon to determine the fixed air flow direction by pressing the button when the icon indicates the desired direction.

NOTE Even if fixed air flow direction is selected, variable air flow direction can be enabled automatically to preserve proper operation of your installation.

3 SCHEDULE TIMER All features and operation and programming of the schedule timer are described below.

Schedule timer operation In schedule timer operation, the installation is also controlled by the schedule timer. The actions programmed in the schedule timer will be executed automatically. The schedule timer always executes the last command; this means the user can temporarily overrule the last executed programmed action. Refer to "Manual operation" on page 5. The next programmed action (in the schedule timer) will return control to the schedule timer.

NOTE The schedule timer overrules the button, only use the button to enable or disable the schedule timer. The schedule timer is enabled when the icon is visible. The button only overrules the schedule timer until the next programmed action.

The programmed schedule is time driven. Make sure that the clock and day of the week are set correctly. Refer to "CLOCK SETTING FUNCTION" on page 4. Manually adjust the clock for summertime and wintertime. Refer to "CLOCK SETTING FUNCTION" on page 4. A power failure exceeding 1 hour will reset the clock and the day of the week. Refer to "CLOCK SETTING FUNCTION" on page 4 to adjust the clock and the day of the week. The actions programmed in the schedule timer will not be lost after a power failure; reprogramming the schedule timer is not required. To set up the SCHEDULE TIMER refer to chapter 6. "Programming the schedule timer" on page 10.

Use the button to enable or disable the schedule timer.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

What can the schedule timer do? The concept of the schedule timer is simple, straightforward though powerful.

The schedule timer can order 3 actions: 1 switch on the installation at a scheduled time, in combination with a setpoint (exact temperature control) 2 switch off the installation (end of control) 3 switch on the installation at a scheduled time, in limit operation The schedule timer can accept a maximum of 5 actions per day. For each day of the week a maximum of 5 actions can be programmed, totalling a maximum of 35 programmed actions. The action that was programmed first for a certain day is action 1, the last programmed action for a day could be action 1 (in case only one action is programmed for that day) to 5. It is of utmost importance to understand that the number assigned to the programmed action, DOES NOT DETERMINE WHEN the programmed action will be executed. Only the TIME, being a part of the data entered when programming the action, will determine when the programmed action will be executed.

What will the schedule timer do? If enabled, the schedule timer will execute the programmed actions. It will order the installation to: •

cool or heat, depending on the current operation, if applicable; the setpoint will be displayed,

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

242 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

switch off the installation (the schedule timer remains enabled and reactivates the installation as programmed); the operation lamp will turn off, cool or heat, whichever is required to keep the room temperature within a specified range (limit operation); and are displayed. The schedule timer will change the operation mode in LIMIT operation only.

To be able to verify the programmed actions, you can browse the programmed actions, see below.

What will the schedule timer NOT do? The schedule timer will not: • control fan speed, • control air flow direction, • control ventilation mode, • control ventilation amount, • change the operation mode for a scheduled setpoint. The parameters listed above can be set manually, without interfering with the schedule timer. More sophisticated remote controllers are available. Consult your dealer for more information.

Browsing the programmed actions in the schedule timer (read-out only) Refer to figure 2. Browsing the programmed actions of the schedule timer is a sequential process. Only 2 buttons are used to browse the entire schedule timer program. The button is used to start browsing, to display the next programmed action or to exit browsing when displaying the last programmed action.

The button is used to exit browsing at once (without having to scroll through all programmed actions). Press the button to enter the browse mode, the icon appears, will blink.

NOTE NOTE Browsing always starts on Monday and ends on Sunday.

Check the icon. If at least 1 action is programmed for Monday, will appear. The clock indicates the time when the programmed action is scheduled, either , or and is being displayed.

NOTE Continue pressing the button until the day of the week indicator displays the current day (not blinking), you have now quit browsing.

The temperatures mentioned above are for clarifying purposes only, temperature values on your controller may vary.

If does not appear, it indicates that there are no programmed actions for Monday. Press the button again to go to the next day of the week. will blink, this indicates that the programmed actions for Tuesday are being browsed. The process described above is now restarted. If at least 1 action is programmed for Tuesday, will appear. The clock indicates the time when the programmed action will be enabled, either , or and is being displayed. If does not appear, it indicates that there are no programmed actions for Tuesday. Press the button to display the next programmed action. If a second action is programmed for Tuesday, will still be blinking and will appear. Assuming that 5 actions were programmed for Tuesday, a total of 5 presses will be required to display all programmed actions.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The number of times that the button will have to be pressed to quit browsing depends on the number of programmed actions in the schedule timer.

How do I interpret the programmed actions To be able to understand the behaviour of your installation when the schedule timer is enabled, it is important to look at all programmed actions for the current day and maybe the last programmed action of yesterday. If the first programmed action for today is not active yet, the current status of your installation depends, most probably but not necessarily, on the last programmed action from yesterday. Read the important note below. If the first programmed action for today is already active, the current status of your installation depends, most probably but not necessarily, on the parameters programmed in the first programmed action for today. Read the important note below.

NOTE To keep the operation of your installation simple, the schedule timer settings can easily be overruled by altering the current setting ("last command" overrules previous command until next scheduled command).

Conclusion: Although is displayed, somebody might have altered the settings. The next programmed action will overrule the altered settings and all settings return as programmed.

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

Programmed actions might overlap; due to the "last command overrules" logic, the last scheduled command will rule.

How do I interpret the readings on the display when the schedule timer is active As described above, the schedule timer settings, (and as a consequence the display readings) might be overruled temporarily by a manual intervention. If you want to be absolutely sure about the schedule timer settings for this very moment, you must browse the schedule timer programmed actions. Refer to "Browsing the programmed actions in the schedule timer" on page 8.

Getting started Programming the schedule timer is flexible (you can add, remove or alter programmed actions whenever required) and straightforward (programming steps are limited to a minimum). Below are some tips and tricks to ensure successful programming of the schedule timer: •

What do I have to program? As the schedule timer is based on a week program (the same actions will be repeated every week) you will have to select the day of the week first. Now you must choose an action: 1 switch on the installation at a scheduled time, in combination with a setpoint (exact temperature control)

familiarise yourself with the icons and the buttons, you will need them when programming, familiarise yourself with the browse function, you will need it to start programming. Refer to "Browsing the programmed actions in the schedule timer" on page 8, fill out the form at the end of this manual; note the time and the required action for each day (keep in mind that the number of actions is limited to 5 per day), take your time to enter all data accurately, try to program the actions for each day in logical sequence (start with action 1 for the first action and end with the highest number for the last action). This is not a requirement but it will make it much easier to interpret the program later, keep in mind that you can always alter, add or remove the programmed actions later.

2 switch off the installation (end of control) 3 switch on the installation at a scheduled time, in limit operation Finally you must enter the time of the day when the action must be enabled.

NOTE If you program 2 or more actions on the same day and at the same time of the day, only the action with the highest action number (2 - 5) will be executed.

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

THE SCHEDULE TIMER IS PROGRAMMED FOR THE FIRST TIME NOTE When changing day during programming you will have to confirm "the last action". Each day can have 5 programmed actions (numbered 1 to 5) but for some reason you might want to delete one, several or all programmed actions. To be able to delete programmed actions, you must select the last action that you want to keep, this can be 1 to 5 or no action ( is displayed and no action displayed). All programmed actions with a number HIGHER than the selected one, or all programmed actions if no last action was selected will be deleted.

In this particular case, no actions have been programmed before, all schedule timer actions are idle. • Browse to Monday by pressing the button. The icon appears, will blink and one of the icons might be displayed but all other fields remain blank, indicating that no actions are programmed for Monday. • Enter the program mode by holding down the button for 5 seconds, the icon will now blink too. •

Press the button to activate the first programmed action.

A blinking is displayed indicating that the first programmed action for Monday is being programmed; The set temperature and clock display are blinking.

temperature, , or limit operation. Enter the desired temperature using the & buttons.

PROGRAMMING THE FIRST DAY OF THE WEEK NOTE In the guidelines below it is assumed that you start programming the schedule timer actions on Monday and end with the schedule timer actions for Sunday. If you prefer NOT to start on Monday, first browse to the desired day and then enter the PROGRAM mode.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

button to select either set

Press the button to toggle between minimum set temperature and maximum set temperature in limit operation, the selected temperature will blink. Enter the time when the action must start using the & buttons (min. step = 10 minutes).

NOTE If, by accident, you pressed the button, you activated the next action; is displayed ( steady and blinking). Press the button repeatedly until a blinking is displayed. You can now continue adjusting the settings for the first schedule timer action.

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

If the action and the corresponding time are correct, you can proceed to the second schedule timer action. This is done by pressing the button, the data is saved and the next schedule timer action can be programmed. Programming the remaining schedule timer actions for the same day is similar. You can browse the schedule timer actions by pressing the button.

NOTE Don't worry if you add additional schedule timer actions by pressing the button repeatedly, they can be deleted when finishing the current day.

When all data for the schedule timer actions for Monday are entered, you must confirm the programmed actions. Make sure the last schedule timer action you want to keep is selected (schedule timer actions with a higher number will be deleted). Now you must choose between 2 options: 1 CONFIRM AND COPY TO NEXT DAY The schedule timer action programmed for the current day are also valid for the next day: use the "confirm last action and copy actions to next day" function by pressing the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds.

Program mode is quit and depending on the choice made, the programmed actions are saved for Monday (and possibly Tuesday). PROGRAMMING THE OTHER DAYS OF THE WEEK Programming the other days of the week is identical to programming the first day of the week. is blinking to indicate the selected day, and are steady if actions were copied from Monday to Tuesday, only is displayed if no actions were copied from Monday to Tuesday. 2 I WANT TO EDIT PROGRAMMED ACTIONS Editing programmed actions is easy. Make sure you are not in program mode ( not blinking); if required, press the button to quit program mode. Browse to the programmed actions using the button, select the day and action you want to edit. Press the button for 5 seconds; program mode is enabled, the icon and selected action are blinking. Edit the settings using the same buttons described above. Select the "last action" using the button and decide if you do or do not want to copy the programmed action(s) to the next day (pressing the and buttons simultaneously or only the button for 5 seconds).

2 CONFIRM ONLY The schedule timer action programmed for the current day are only valid for the selected day: use the "confirm last action and go to next day" function by pressing the button for 5 seconds.

BRC1D528 Remote controller 4PW23717-1

I WANT TO DELETE ONE OR MORE PROGRAMMED ACTIONS Make sure you are not in program mode ( not blinking); if required, press to quit program mode. Browse to the programmed actions using the button, select the day you want to edit. Press the button for 5 seconds; program mode is enabled, the icon and selected action are blinking. Select the "last action" you want to keep using the button. All higher actions will be deleted. Confirm the deletion by pressing the button for 5 seconds, OR confirm the deletion for the current and the next day too by pressing the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds.

NOTE In the case above, if for example the last action was 3, the programmed actions 4 and 5 will also be deleted (if they were present).

I WANT TO DELETE ALL PROGRAMMED ACTIONS AT ONCE Quit programming or browsing. Press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds; the icon will invert and disappear to confirm deletion.

7. Maintenance The remote controller does not need maintenance. Remove dirt with a soft damp cloth. NOTE

8. Troubleshooting The guidelines below might help to solve your problem. If you cannot remedy the problem, consult your installer. No readings on the remote controller (display blank) Check if the mains power is still applied to your installation. Only

This indicates that the installation has just been powered, please wait until disappears. The schedule timer does work but the programmed actions are executed at the wrong time (e.g. 1 hour too late or too early) Check if the clock and the day of the week are set correctly, correct if necessary (refer to "CLOCK SETTING FUNCTION" on page 4). I cannot enable the schedule timer (the icon blinks for 2 seconds and disappears) The schedule timer has not been programmed yet. First program the schedule timer (refer to "Programming the schedule timer" on page 10). I cannot enable the schedule timer (the icon is displayed) The schedule timer can not be enabled when a centralised control is connected. Limit operation cannot be selected Limit operation is not available for cooling only installations.

Only use clear tepid water to moisten the cloth.

Operation Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Part 6 Service Diagnosis 1. Troubleshooting with LED 250 1.1 Indoor Unit250 1.2 Outdoor Unit 252

2. Problem Symptoms and Measures 253 3. Service Check Function 254 3.1 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series254 3.2 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 263

4. Code Indication on Remote Controller 267 4.1 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series267 4.2 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 267 4.3 Sub Codes for SA Indoor Unit 268 4.4 Outdoor Unit 269

5. Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series 270 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

6. Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series284 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8

7.4 Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) / Anti-icing Function in Other Rooms301 7.5 Anti-icing Function302 7.6 Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality304 7.7 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) 305 7.8 Compressor Lock 306 7.9 DC Fan Lock 307 7.10 Input Overcurrent Detection 308 7.11 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control309 7.12 High Pressure Control in Cooling 310 7.13 Compressor Sensor System Abnormality 311 7.14 Position Sensor Abnormality 313 7.15 CT or Related Abnormality 315 7.16 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit)317 7.17 Electrical Box Temperature Rise319 7.18 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise 321 7.19 Output Overcurrent Detection 323

8. Check 325 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15

Thermistor Resistance Check 325 Fan Motor Connector Check 326 Hall IC Check 327 Indoor Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check 327 Power Supply Waveform Check328 Outdoor Electronic Expansion Valve Check329 Four Way Valve Performance Check 330 Inverter Unit Refrigerant System Check330 “Inverter Checker” Check 331 Rotation Pulse Check on the Outdoor Unit PCB 332 Installation Condition Check333 Discharge Pressure Check333 Outdoor Fan System Check 334 Capacitor Voltage Check334 Power Module Check 335

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting with LED SiBE121135

1. Troubleshooting with LED 1.1

The operation lamp blinks when any of the following errors is detected. 1. When a protection device of the indoor or outdoor unit is activated, or when the thermistor malfunctions. 2. When a signal transmission error occurs between the indoor and outdoor units. In either case, conduct the diagnostic procedure described in the following pages. Wall Mounted Type: FTXG Series

Operation lamp (multi-colored)

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-K, CTXS-K Series

Operation lamp (green)

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-J Series

Wall Mounted Type: FTXS-G Series

Operation lamp (green) Operation lamp (green)

Floor Standing Type: FVXG Series

Operation lamp (green) (R14646)

250 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting with LED Floor Standing Type: FVXS Series

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type Operation lamp (green)

Operation lamp (green) (R11687)

Duct Connected Type Operation lamp (green)

BRC1E52A7, BRC1E52B7 Operation lamp (red)

Operation lamp (green)

When operation stops suddenly and the operation lamp blinks, it could be "operation mode conflict". Check followings; Are the operation modes all the same for the indoor units connected to multi system outdoor unit? If not, set all the indoor units to the same operation mode and confirm that the operation lamp is not blinking. Moreover, when the operation mode is automatic, set all the indoor unit operation mode as "cooling" or "heating" and check again if the operation lamp is normal. If the lamp stops blinking after the above steps, there is no malfunction. ∗ Operation stops and operation lamp blinks only for indoor unit which different operation mode is set later. (The first set operation mode has priority.)

The indoor unit has one green LED (LED A) on the control PCB. When the microcomputer works in order, the LED A blinks.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting with LED

Outdoor Unit The outdoor unit has one green LED (LED A) on the PCB. When the LED A blinks, the microcomputer works in order.

Service monitor PCB LED A LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

LED A LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5

5-room model (R17270)

There are a green LED (LED A) and red LEDs on the outdoor unit PCB. The LED A indicates microcomputer operation condition. In normal condition, the LED A is blinking and the other LEDs are OFF. Even after the error is canceled and the unit operates in normal condition, the LED indication remains.

Problem Symptoms and Measures

2. Problem Symptoms and Measures Problem Symptom

None of the units operates. Check the power supply. Check the types of the indoor units. Check the outdoor temperature.

Diagnose with remote controller indication Check the remote controller addresses. Operation sometimes stops.

Check the power supply. Check the outdoor temperature.

Some indoor units do not operate.

Units operate but do not cool, or do not heat.

Diagnose with remote controller indication. Check the type of the indoor units. Diagnose with remote controller indication Check for wiring and piping errors in the connection between the indoor and outdoor units.

Details of Measure Check if the rated voltage is supplied. Check if the indoor unit type is compatible with the outdoor unit. Heating operation cannot be used when the outdoor temperature is 20°C or higher, and cooling operation cannot be used when the outdoor temperature is below –10 ~ 10°C (depending on the model).

Check if address settings for the remote controller and indoor unit are correct. A power failure of 2 to 10 cycles can stop air conditioner operation. (Operation lamp OFF) Heating operation cannot be used when the outdoor temperature is 20°C or higher, and cooling operation cannot be used when the outdoor temperature is below –10 ~ 10°C (depending on the model).

Large operating noise and Check the output voltage of the vibrations power module. Check the power module. Check the installation condition.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Check if the indoor unit type is compatible with the outdoor unit.

Conduct the wiring/piping error check described on the product diagnosis nameplate.

Check for thermistor detection errors. Check if the thermistor is mounted securely. Check for faulty operation of the Set all the units to cooling operation, and outdoor electronic expansion valve. compare the temperatures of the liquid pipes to see if the each outdoor electronic expansion valve works. Diagnose with remote controller indication. Diagnose by service port pressure and operating current.

— Check for refrigerant shortage.

Check if the required spaces for installation (specified in the installation manual) are provided.

RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

3.1.1 ARC466 Series Remote Controller Check Method 1

1. When the timer cancel button is held down for 5 seconds, 00 is displayed on the temperature display screen.

2. Press the timer cancel button repeatedly until a long beep sounds. The code indication changes in the sequence shown below. <ARC466A1, A6> No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1. A short beep and two consecutive beeps indicate non-corresponding codes. 2. To return to the normal mode, hold the timer cancel button down for 5 seconds. When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it also returns to the normal mode. 3. Not all the error codes are displayed. When you cannot find the error code, try the check method 2. (→ Refer to page 255.)

Check Method 2 1. Press the center of the [Temp] button and the [Mode] button at the same time.

5C is displayed on the LCD.

2. Select 5C (service check) with the [Temp]

3. Press the [Mode] button to enter the service check mode.

The left-side number blinks.

button and change the number until you hear the two consecutive 4. Press the [Temp] or beeps or the long beep.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service Check Function

5. Diagnose by the sound. beep : The left-side number does not correspond with the error code. tow consecutive beeps : The left-side number corresponds with the error code but the right-side number does not. long beep : Both the left-side and right-side numbers correspond with the error code. The numbers indicated when you hear the long beep are the error code. Error codes and description → Refer to page 267. 6. Press the [Mode] button.

button and change the number until you hear the long beep.

8. Diagnose by the sound. beep : The left-side number does not correspond with the error code. two consecutive beeps : The left-side number corresponds with the error code but the right-side number does not. long beep : Both the left-side and right-side numbers correspond with the error code. 9. Determine the error code. The numbers indicated when you hear the long beep are the error code. Error codes and description → Refer to page 267. 10. Press the [Mode] button for 5 seconds to exit from the service check mode. (When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode also.)

1. When the timer cancel button is held down for 5 seconds, 00 is displayed on the temperature display screen.

< ARC452 Series > (R14554)

2. Press the timer cancel button repeatedly until a long beep sounds. The code indication changes in the sequence shown below. <ARC452A1, A3>

1. A short beep or 2 consecutive beeps indicate non-corresponding codes. 2. To return to the normal mode, hold the timer cancel button down for 5 seconds. When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it also returns to the normal mode. 3. Not all the error codes are displayed. When you cannot find the error code, try the check method 2. (→ Refer to page 258.)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

, [MODE]) at the same time to enter the diagnosis

The left-side number blinks.

2. Press the [TEMP] or beeps or the long beep.

button and change the number until you hear the two consecutive

3. Diagnose by the sound. beep : The left-side number does not correspond with the error code. two consecutive beeps : The left-side number corresponds with the error code but the right-side number does not. long beep : Both the left-side and right-side numbers correspond with the error code. The numbers indicated when you hear the long beep are the error code. Error codes and description → Refer to page 267. 4. Press the [MODE] button.

button and change the number until you hear the long beep.

6. Diagnose by the sound. beep : The left-side number does not correspond with the error code. two consecutive beeps : The left-side number corresponds with the error code but the right-side number does not. long beep : Both the left-side and right-side numbers correspond with the error code. 7. Determine the error code. The numbers indicated when you hear the long beep are the error code. Error codes and description → Refer to page 267. 8. Press the [MODE] button to exit from the diagnosis mode.

The display means the trial operation mode. Refer to page 408 for trial operation.

9. Press the [ON/OFF] button twice to return to the normal mode.

When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. When the timer cancel button is held down for 5 seconds, 00 is displayed on the temperature display screen.

2. Press the timer cancel button repeatedly until a long beep sounds. The code indication changes in the sequence shown below. <ARC433B67, B69> No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1. A short beep or two consecutive beeps indicate non-corresponding codes. 2. To return to the normal mode, hold the timer cancel button down for 5 seconds. When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it also returns to the normal mode. 3. Not all the error codes are displayed. When you cannot find the error code, try the check method 2. (→ Refer to page 261.)

Check Method 2 1. Press the center of the [TEMP] button and the [MODE] button at the same time to enter the diagnosis mode.

The left-side number blinks.

2. Press the [TEMP] or beeps or the long beep.

button and change the number until you hear the two consecutive

The right-side number blinks.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

button and change the number until you hear the long beep.

The display means the trial operation mode. Refer to page 408 for trial operation.

9. Press the [ON/OFF] button twice to return to the normal mode.

When the remote controller is left untouched for 60 seconds, it returns to the normal mode.

Service Check Function

SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

3.2.1 Relations between Modes BRC1D528 The following modes can be selected by using the [Inspection / Test] button on the remote controller.

Indoor unit settings can be made. z Filter cleaning sign time z Others

Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button for more than 4 seconds.

Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button once.

Service data can be obtained. z Error code history z Temperature data of various sections Service settings can be made. z Forced fan ON z Airflow rate setting

Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button once.

Normal mode Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button once or leave the remote controller untouched for 30 minutes. After 10 seconds

Following codes can be checked. Inspection z Error codes mode z Indoor model code

Thermostat is forcibly turned on.

Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button once.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Press button for 4 seconds or more.

Press button once. Press button for 4 seconds or more.

Field Setting screen

<Field Setting Menu> • Test operation ON/OFF • Register Service Contract • Field setting list • Group No. setting • Indoor unit AIRNET No. set • Outdoor unit AIRNET No. set • Error record • Indoor status display • Outdoor status display • Fan forced operation ON • Main/Sub changeover • Filter element sign OFF

Service Check Function

3.2.2 BRC1D528 If operation stops due to malfunction, the operation lamp on the remote controller blinks, and error code is displayed. (Even if stop operation is carried out, malfunction contents are displayed when inspection mode is entered.) The error code enables you to tell what kind of malfunction caused operation to stop. Refer to page 267 for error code and malfunction contents. Operation lamp [ON/OFF] button

Display of indoor unit for which a malfunction has been detected

Inspection display Error code

[INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button (R14423)

1. When you press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button, the inspection display blinks. 2. While in the inspection mode, press the [ON/OFF] button for 5 seconds or more to clear the failure history indication. In this case, the error code blinks twice and then changes to 00 (= Normal), the UNIT No. changes to 0, and the operation mode automatically switches from the inspection mode to the normal mode (displaying the set temperature).

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service Check Function

3.2.3 BRC1E52A7, BRC1E52B7 The following display appears on the screen when a error (or a warning) occurs during operation. Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.

(1) Check if it is error or warning. Operation status

The operation lamp (green) starts to blink. The message The system "Error: Press Menu Button" stops operating. appears and blinks at the bottom of the screen. (R12858)

The system continues its operation.

The operation lamp (green) remains on. The message "Warning: Press Menu Button" appears and blinks at the bottom of the screen. (R12857)

(2) Take corrective action. · Press the [Menu/Enter] button to check the error code.

· Take the corrective action specific to the model. Error code

Code Indication on Remote Controller

4. Code Indication on Remote Controller 4.1

RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series Error Codes

Fan motor or related abnormality

Indoor unit PCB abnormality

Freeze-up protection control or heating peak-cut control

DC motor (wall, floor standing)

AC motor (floor / ceiling, duct) Radiant panel temperature rise, indoor electronic expansion valve (motor operated valve) abnormality, freeze-up protection control (FVXG series only)

Indoor heat exchanger thermistor or related abnormality

Front panel open / close fault (FTXG series only)

Room temperature thermistor or related abnormality

CE Radiant panel thermistor or related abnormality (FVXG series only)

UA Signal transmission error (between indoor unit and outdoor unit)

Unspecified voltage (between indoor unit and outdoor unit)

00 A1 A3 A6 A7 AF C4 C9

Indoor unit PCB abnormality

Drain water level system abnormality

Fan motor or related abnormality

Swing motor lock (FHQ series only)

Drain system abnormality

Indoor heat exchanger thermistor or related abnormality

Room temperature thermistor or related abnormality

Remote controller thermistor abnormality

Signal transmission error (between indoor unit and remote controller)

Signal transmission error (between MAIN remote controller and SUB remote controller)

UA Field setting abnormality

: Error code displays automatically and system stops. Inspect and solve the error. : In the case of the shaded error codes, “inspection” is not displayed. The system operates, but be sure to inspect and solve the error.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Code Indication on Remote Controller

Sub Codes for SA Indoor Unit If an error code like the one shown below is displayed when the navigation remote controller (BRC1E52A7, BRC1E52B7) is in use, make a detailed diagnosis or a diagnosis of the relevant unit referring to the attached list. Error codes

268 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting A locked fan motor current has been detected. Turn the fan by hand to check for the connection of connectors. A fan motor overcurrent has been detected. Check for the connection of the connector between the fan motor and the PCB. If the connection is normal, replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the error, replace the PCB.

An error in the detection of position of the fan motor. Check for the connection of the connector between the fan motor and the PCB. If the connection is normal, replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the error, replace the PCB. Transmission error (between the selfCheck for the connection of the harness cleaning decoration panel and the indoor connector between the panel PCB and unit) the indoor unit PCB. [when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted] Dust detection sensor error [when the self-cleaning decoration panel is mounted]

Check for the connections of the connector X12A on the panel PCB and the connectors X18A and X19A on the sensor PCBs. Dust collection sign error Check for clogging with dust at the dust [when the self-cleaning decoration panel collection port as well as in the brush is mounted] unit, S-shaped pipe, and dust box. Furthermore, check for any stains of the light receiving and emitting parts of the infrared unit. Air filter rotation error Check for anything getting in the way of [when the self-cleaning decoration panel rotating the filter (e.g. the filter comes off is mounted] or the drive gear is clogged with foreign matters). Damper rotation error The damper does not rotate normally. [when the self-cleaning decoration panel Check for any foreign matters around the is mounted] damper and for the operation of the gear and limit switch. Filter self-cleaning operation error The unit has not yet completed the filter [when the self-cleaning decoration panel self-cleaning operation even after the is mounted] lapse of specified period of time. Check for any external noise, etc. Filter self-cleaning operation start The unit has been put into a state in disabled error which the filter self-cleaning operation is [when the self-cleaning decoration panel disabled. Check the unit for the operating is mounted] conditions. Faulty combination of indoor unit PCB

and fan PCB A combination of indoor unit PCB and fan PCB is defective. Check whether the capacity setting adaptor is correct and the type of the fan PCB is correct.

Code Indication on Remote Controller

Outdoor Unit i: ON, h: OFF, j: Blinks Green : Blinks in normal condition Red : OFF in normal condition Outdoor Unit LED Indication

UA Normal condition Unspecified voltage (between indoor unit and outdoor unit)

UH (U0) U2 U7 A5 E1 (E5) (E6) E7 E8 F3 F6 H0 H6 H8 H9

Anti-icing function in other rooms

Refrigerant shortage

Low-voltage detection or over-voltage detection

Signal transmission error (on outdoor unit PCB)

Outdoor unit PCB abnormality

OL activation (compressor overload)

Input overcurrent detection

Discharge pipe temperature control

High pressure control in cooling

Compressor sensor system abnormality

Position sensor abnormality

CT or related abnormality

Outdoor temperature thermistor or related abnormality

Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor or related abnormality

Liquid pipe thermistor or related abnormality

Gas pipe thermistor or related abnormality

Radiation fin thermistor or related abnormality

Output overcurrent detection

1. The error codes in the parenthesis ( ) are displayed only when the system is shut down. 2. When a sensor error occurs, check the remote controller display to determine which sensor is malfunctioning. If the remote controller does not indicate the error code, conduct the following procedure. ∗ Turn the power switch off and back on again. If the same LED indication appears again immediately after the power is turned on, the fault is in the thermistor. ∗ If the above condition does not result, the fault is in the CT. 3. The indoor unit error code may take the precedence in the remote controller display. 4. 3-room models and 4-room models do not have LED5.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

5. Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series 5.1

Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The system checks if the circuit works properly within the microcomputer of the indoor unit.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The system cannot set the internal settings.

Wrong models interconnected Defective indoor unit PCB Disconnection of connector Reduction of power supply voltage

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the combination of the indoor and outdoor unit.

NO Match the compatible models.

YES ∗ To secure the connection, once disconnect the connector and then reconnect it.

Check the connection of connectors (See Note).

YES Check the power supply voltage.

NO Voltage as rated?

NO Correct the power supply.

YES Start operation.

Correct the connection.

YES NO Error repeats?

YES Replace the indoor unit PCB. Completed.

Check the power supply voltage.

NO Voltage as rated?

NO Correct the power supply.

YES Start operation.

NO YES Replace the indoor unit PCB. Completed. Completed. (R15310)

Check the following connector. Model Type

Wall mounted type Floor standing type

Terminal board ~ Control PCB Terminal board ~ Control PCB Floor / ceiling suspended dual type Duct connected type

Terminal board ~ Control PCB Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Freeze-up Protection Control or Heating Peak-cut Control

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Freeze-up protection control During cooling operation, the freeze-up protection control (operation halt) is activated according to the temperature detected by the indoor heat exchanger thermistor. Heating peak-cut control During heating operation, the temperature detected by the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is used for the heating peak-cut control (operation halt, outdoor fan stop, etc.)

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Freeze-up protection control During cooling operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature is below 0°C. Heating peak-cut control During heating operation, the indoor heat exchanger temperature is above 65°C.

Short-circuited air Clogged air filter of the indoor unit Dust accumulation on the indoor heat exchanger Defective indoor heat exchanger thermistor Defective indoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Check the air passage.

Is there any short circuit?

YES Provide sufficient air passage.

NO Check the air filter.

Dirty? Is it very dirty?

YES Clean the air filter.

NO Check the dust accumulation on the indoor heat exchanger.

Dirty? Is it very dirty?

YES Clean the indoor heat exchanger.

NO Check Check No. No. 01 06 Check Check the the indoor indoor heat heat exchanger exchanger thermistor. thermistor.

Does it Asconform described in the to the thermistor characteristic characteristic thermistor chart? chart?

YES NO Replace the thermistor.

Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R15715) (R7131)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Fan Motor or Related Abnormality

5.3.1 DC Motor (Wall Mounted Type, Floor Standing Type) Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The rotation speed detected by the Hall IC during fan motor operation is used to determine abnormal fan motor operation.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The detected rotation speed does not reach the demanded rotation speed of the target tap, and is less than 50% of the maximum fan motor rotation speed.

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

FTXG, FTXS-J, FTXS-G, FVXG, FVXS Series Caution

Check No.02 Refer to P.326

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power supply and rotate the fan by hand.

Does the fan rotate smoothly?

NO Replace the indoor fan motor.

YES Turn the power on and start operation.

Does the fan rotate?

Turn off the power supply NO and disconnect the fan motor connector, then turn the power on.

YES Note : The motor may break when the motor connector is disconnected while remaining power supply.

Check No.02 Check the output of the fan motor connector

Is the motor power supply voltage 310 ~ 340 VDC generated?

NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.

YES Is the motor control voltage 15 VDC generated?

NO Check No.02 Check the output of the fan motor connector

Is the rotation pulse generated?

YES Is the rotation pulse generated?

YES NO NO Replace the indoor fan motor and the indoor unit PCB. Replace the indoor unit PCB. Replace the indoor fan motor.

Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R14970)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

FTXS-K, CTXS-K Series Caution

Check No.03 Refer to P.326

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power. (Unplug the power cable or turn the breaker OFF.)

Note: The motor may break when the motor connector is disconnected while remaining power supply. (Turn off the power supply before connecting the connector also.)

Check the connector for connection.

∗ To secure the connection, once disconnect the connector and then reconnect it.

NO Correct the connection.

YES Foreign matters in or around the fan?

YES Remove the foreign matters.

Fan rotates smoothly?

YES Turn the power on again.

Check No. 03 Check the motor control voltage.

Is the motor control voltage 15 VDC generated?

NO Replace the indoor unit PCB (1).

YES Check No. 03 Check the indoor unit PCB for rotation pulse.

Is the rotation pulse generated?

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

5.3.2 AC Motor (Duct Connected Type, Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type) Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The rotation speed detected by the Hall IC during fan motor operation is used to determine abnormal fan motor operation.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The detected rotation speed does not reach the demanded rotation speed of the target tap, and is less than 50% of the maximum fan motor rotation speed.

Layer short inside the fan motor winding Breaking of wire inside the fan motor Breaking of the fan motor lead wires Defective capacitor of the fan motor

Defective indoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.04 Refer to P.327

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Does the fan rotate?

Check Hall IC NO Turn off the power supply and rotate the fan by hand.

Does the fan rotate smoothly?

NO YES YES Replace the fan motor or the indoor unit PCB. Replace the fan motor.

Check the fan motor voltage.

Turn the power on and check the fan motor voltage. (immediately after restart)

YES Voltage as rated? ∗

∗ Measure the voltage between the red and black lead wires of the fan motor, and check if the maximum voltage reaches the rated voltage.

Replace the fan motor.

Replace the indoor unit PCB.

YES Check the capacitor's continuity.

Is there continuity?

NO YES Replace the capacitor. (Replace the indoor unit PCB.) Replace the fan motor. (R16009)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Radiant Panel Temperature Rise, Indoor Electronic Expansion Valve (Motor Operated Valve) Abnormality, Freeze-up Protection Control (FVXG Series Only)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Radiant panel temperature rise During RADIANT operation, high temperature control (e.g., operation halt, indoor electronic expansion valve closure) is activated according to the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistors. Indoor electronic expansion valve abnormality The indoor electronic expansion valve is required to be fully closed during cooling, dry or heating operation. When the indoor electronic expansion valve is open due to malfunction, the refrigerant flows into the radiant panel and the radiant panel temperature rises or drops. The indoor electronic expansion valve is required to be open during RADIANT operation. When the indoor electronic expansion valve is closed due to malfunction, the refrigerant does not flow into the radiant panel and the radiant panel temperature does not rise. For multi system The indoor electronic expansion valve is required to be fully closed in the room where the system does not run. When the indoor electronic expansion valve is open due to malfunction and heating or RADIANT operation is conducted in the other room(s), the refrigerant flows into the radiant panel and the radiant panel temperature rises. Freeze-up protection control The temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistors is used to prevent the indoor unit from freezing during cooling operation.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Radiant panel temperature rise The radiant panel surface temperature calculated by the radiant panel thermistors is above 70°C. Indoor electronic expansion valve abnormality During cooling or dry operation, the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistor (φ 4) has dropped. During heating operation, the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistor (φ 4) has risen. During RADIANT operation, the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistor (φ 4) does not rise. For multi system While the system does not run and heating or RADIANT operation is conducted in the other room(s), the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistor (φ 4) has risen. Freeze-up protection control During cooling operation, the operation stops when the temperature detected by the radiant panel thermistor (φ 4) has dropped.

Clogged air filter of the indoor unit Dust accumulation on the indoor heat exchanger Short-circuited air Defective radiant panel thermistor(s) Defective indoor heat exchanger thermistor Defective room temperature thermistor Defective indoor electronic expansion valve (or coil)

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Check No.06 Refer to P.327

Check the operation condition.

Condition OK? YES Check No. 06 Check the indoor electronic expansion valve coil.

∗ When the outdoor temperature is below the lower limit for cooling operation (10˚C), the freeze-up protection control is activated and the cooling operation stops. NO Start operation within the specified range of the outdoor temperature.

NO Replace the indoor electronic expansion valve coil.

YES Check No. 01 ·Radiant panel thermistors ·Indoor heat exchanger thermistor ·Room temperature thermistor

Does it conform to the thermistor characteristic chart?

NO YES Replace the thermistor. ·Radiant panel thermistors ·Indoor heat exchanger thermistor ·Room temperature thermistor

Check the air passage.

Is there any short circuit?

NO Check the air filter.

YES Clean the air filter.

NO Check the indoor heat exchanger.

YES Clean the indoor heat exchanger.

NO Change the refrigerant to remove moisture from the piping (after drawing a vacuum).

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Thermistor or Related Abnormality (RA Indoor Unit)

Remote Controller Display

C4, C9, CE Method of Malfunction Detection

The temperatures detected by the thermistors are used to determine thermistor errors.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The thermistor input is more than 4.96 V or less than 0.04 V during compressor operation.

Disconnection of connector Defective thermistor

Defective indoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the connection of connectors.

NO Correct the connection.

C4 : Indoor heat exchanger thermistor C9 : Room temperature thermistor CE : Radiant panel thermistor (FVXG series only)

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Front Panel Open / Close Fault (FTXG Series Only) C7

Remote Controller Display Method of Malfunction Detection Malfunction Decision Conditions

If the error repeats, the system is shut down.

Defective reduction motor Malfunction or deterioration of the front panel mechanism Defective limit switch

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Restart and check the movement.

Does the front panel move?

YES NO Remove the front panel and check the movement.

Does the front panel mechanism move?

YES NO Replace the assembly of the front panel mechanism. Replace the harness and reduction motor.

Does the front panel open / close fully?

NO YES Restart. Does the error code reappear?

YES NO Replace the assembly of the front panel mechanism. +Check the movement of the right and left separately by hand. It is supposed such as deformation of the panel or stuffed dust. Find out the cause. Replace the limit switch.

You cannot operate the unit by the remote controller when the front panel mechanism breaks down. <To the dealers: temporary measure before repair> 1. Turn off the power. 2. Remove the front panel. 3. Turn on the power. (Wait until the initialization finishes.) 4. Operate the unit by the indoor unit [ON/OFF] button.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The data received from the outdoor unit in indoor unit-outdoor unit signal transmission is checked whether it is normal.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The data sent from the outdoor unit cannot be received normally, or the content of the data is abnormal.

Wiring error Breaking of the connection wires between the indoor and outdoor units (wire No. 3) Defective outdoor unit PCB Defective indoor unit PCB Disturbed power supply waveform

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.11 Refer to P.328

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the indoor unit - outdoor unit connection wires.

Is there any wiring error?

YES Correct the indoor unit outdoor unit connection wires.

NO Check the voltage of the indoor unit-outdoor unit connection wires between No. 1 and No. 3, and between No. 2 and No. 3.

YES NO Replace the connection wires between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.

Check the LED A on the outdoor unit PCB.

NO Diagnose the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Check No.11 Check the power supply waveform.

Is there any disturbance?

YES NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.

Locate the cause of the disturbance of the power supply waveform, and correct it. (R15782)

Troubleshooting for RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit)

Remote Controller Display

UA Method of Malfunction Detection

The supply power is detected for its requirements (different from pair type and multi type) by the indoor / outdoor transmission signal.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The pair type and multi type are interconnected.

Wrong models interconnected Wrong wiring of connecting wires Wrong indoor unit PCB or outdoor unit PCB mounted

Defective indoor unit PCB Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the combination of the indoor and outdoor unit.

NO Match the compatible models.

YES Are the connection wires connected property?

NO Correct the connection.

YES Check the code numbers (2P01234, for example) of the indoor and outdoor unit PCB with the Parts List.

YES NO Change for the correct PCB.

Replace the indoor unit PCB (or the outdoor unit PCB). (R11707)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

6. Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 6.1

Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The system checks the data from EEPROM.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the data from the EEPROM is not received correctly

EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory): A memory chip that holds its content without power. It can be erased, either within the computer or externally and usually requires more voltage for erasure than the common +5 volts used in logic circuits. It functions like non-volatile RAM, but writing to EEPROM is slower than writing to RAM.

Defective indoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Switch the power off and on again to restart.

NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.

YES External factor other than malfunction. (for example, noise etc.) (R11294)

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Drain Water Level System Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The float switch detects error.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the water level reaches its upper limit and when the float switch turns OFF Supposed Causes

Defective drain pump Improper drain piping work Clogged drain piping Defective float switch

Defective indoor unit PCB Defective short circuit connector X15A on indoor unit PCB Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Is the unit a ceiling suspended type?

NO YES YES Is the optional drain raising mechanism connected? NO Is the short circuit connector connected to X15A on the indoor unit PCB?

NO Connect the short circuit connector.

YES Check the continuity of the short circuit connector. Is there continuity?

NO YES Is the drain pump connected to the indoor unit PCB?

Does the drain pump work after restarting operation?

NO YES Connect the drain pump.

Set to "emergency" and check the voltage of the connector for the drain pump. 220 ~ 240 VAC?

YES Is the drain water level abnormally high?

Replace the indoor unit PCB.

NO YES YES Connect the short circuit connector.

NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.

Replace the drain pump. There is a drain system abnormality.

NO Is the float switch connected to X15A?

NO Connect the float switch.

YES Remove the float switch from X15A, short circuit X15A, and restart operation.

Does A3 appear on the remote controller display?

YES NO Replace the float switch.

Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R17250)

If A3 is detected by the indoor unit PCB which is not mounted with X15A, the indoor unit PCB is defective.

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Fan Motor or Related Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The signal from the fan motor detects abnormal fan speed.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the fan rotations are not detected while the output voltage to the fan is at its maximum

Defective indoor fan motor Broken or disconnected wire Defective contact Defective indoor unit PCB FCQC, FFQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Is the wiring from the fan motor securely connected to connectors on the indoor unit PCB?

NO Connect the wiring and turn on again.

YES Does the fan motor run?

NO Replace the fan motor.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the connections of X20A and X26A.

Are X20A or X26A or both properly connected?

NO Connect them correctly.

YES Disconnect X26A and turn the power on. Check the voltage between the pins 1 and 3 of X26A.

There is a possibility of open phase power supply, also check the power supply.

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Swing Motor Lock (FHQ Series Only)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The error is detected by the limit switch when the motor turns.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the ON/OFF micro-switch for position detection cannot be reversed even though the swing motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).

Defective swing motor Defective micro-switch Disconnection of connector

Defective indoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Are the connectors correctly connected to X29A and X14A on the PCB?

NO Connect the connectors correctly.

YES Is the relay connector of the limit switch correctly connected?

NO Connect the connector correctly.

YES Turn the power supply off once and back on. Check whether the swing motor swings when the power supply is turned back on.

Does the swing motor swing?

Disconnect X14A, turn the power YES supply off once and back on. Check if the limit switch has continuity when the power supply is turned back on.

NO Turn the power supply off once and back on. Measure the output voltage of connector X29A when the power supply is turned back on.

Does continuity/ no continuity reverse?

YES Replace the indoor unit PCB.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Drain System Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

AF Method of Malfunction Detection

Water leakage is detected based on the float switch ON/OFF changeover while the compressor is not operating.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is OFF Supposed Causes

Error in the drain pipe installation Defective float switch

Defective indoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Are the float switch and the drain pipe normal?

NO YES Is the water drain system normal?

NO YES The float switch may be defective. Check if the drain-up height and the horizontal pipe length exceed the specifications. Clogged water drain system, clogged drain pump, or faulty float switch Replace the indoor unit PCB. Check if the drain-up height and the horizontal pipe length exceed the specifications. (R16022)

∗ In FHQ, problems can also occur in the optional drain pump. Is a drain-up kit installed?

NO Check the jumper connector.

YES Is the drain pump normal?

NO Check the drain pump and the drain pipe.

YES Is the amount of circulated drain water excessive after the pump stops operation?

YES NO Does the drain water flow in reverse while the indoor unit is not operating?

NO YES Check the water drain system. Check to see if the drain-up height and the horizontal pipe length exceed the specifications.

Faulty trap in the water drain system Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R13752)

290 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Thermistor or Related Abnormality (SA Indoor Unit)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

The temperatures detected by the thermistors determine thermistor errors.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The thermistor input is more than 4.96 V or less than 0.04 V during compressor operation.

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Disconnection of connector Defective thermistor Defective indoor unit PCB If the cause of the problem is related to the thermistors, the thermistors should be checked prior to changing the indoor unit PCB. To check the thermistors, proceed as follows: Step 1 2 3

Action Disconnect the thermistor from the indoor unit PCB. Read the temperature and the resistance value. Check if the measured values correspond with the values in the table of thermistor resistance check.

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the connection of connectors.

NO Correct the connection.

NO YES Replace the thermistor. (Replace the indoor unit PCB.) Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R14406)

C4 : Indoor heat exchanger thermistor (R2T, R3T) C9 : Room temperature thermistor (R1T)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality

CJ Remote Controller Display Method of Malfunction Detection

Even if remote controller thermistor is faulty, system is possible to operate by system thermistor. Malfunction detection is carried out by the temperature detected by remote controller thermistor.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

When the remote controller thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.

Defective thermistor Broken wire

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Delete the record of error codes. (See note.) Is CJ displayed on the remote controller again?

NO External factor other than equipment malfunction. (for example, noise etc.)

YES Replace the remote controller.

To delete the record of error codes, press the [ON/OFF] button for 4 seconds or more while the error code is displayed in the inspection mode.

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Signal Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Remote Controller)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers) Defective indoor unit PCB Defective remote controller Transmission error caused by noise

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Using 2 remote controllers?

YES YES Set one remote controller to "SUB"; turn the power supply off once and then back on.

NO NO All indoor PCB microcomputer monitors blink?

Is SS1 of both remote controllers set to "MAIN"?

NO Operation returns to normal when the power is turned off momentarily.

YES YES Replace the remote controller.

YES Return to normal?

NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.

There is possibility of malfunction caused by noise. Check the surrounding area and turn on again.

There is possibility of malfunction caused by noise. Check the surrounding area and turn on again. (R13008)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

Signal Transmission Error (between MAIN Remote Controller and SUB Remote Controller)

Remote Controller Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

In case of controlling with 2 remote controllers, check the system using micro-computer if signal transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Remote controller is set to “SUB” when using 1 remote controller Connection of 2 sub remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)

Defective remote controller PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Using 2 remote controllers?

NO YES NO Set SS1 to "MAIN"; turn the power supply off once and then back on.

YES YES Is SS1 of both remote controllers set to "SUB"?

Is SS1 of remote controller PCB set to "SUB"?

NO Turn the power off and then back on. If a malfunction occurs, replace the remote controller PCB. Set one remote controller to "MAIN"; turn the power supply off once and then back on. (R15321)

294 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

6.10 Field Setting Abnormality Remote Controller Display

UA Method of Malfunction Detection Malfunction Decision Conditions Supposed Causes

Incorrect field setting

Defective indoor unit PCB Defective outdoor unit PCB Defective power supply PCB Indoor-outdoor, indoor-indoor unit transmission wiring Defective remote controller wiring

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Is the remote controller connected to one or more indoor units?

YES Connect the remote controller correctly.

NO Is the remote controller wiring jumped between indoor units?

YES Remove the jumper.

NO Is the field setting correct?

NO Set the field setting correctly.

YES Do the service monitor LED (HAP) on all indoor unit PCB blink?

NO Are the wirings between indoor unit and outdoor unit correctly connected?

NO YES YES Is 220 ~ 240 VAC between No.1 and 3 of the terminal board for transmission (indoor unit)?

Turn the power supply off once, and back on to restart.

YES NO Does the system conduct normal operation?

YES Connect the wirings correctly.

NO Are the wirings between indoor unit and outdoor unit correctly connected?

YES Check the power supply system inside the indoor unit.

Could be incorrect wiring. Check again. NO Connect the wirings correctly.

Replace the indoor unit PCB. Normal (R17253)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7. Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit 7.1

Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Refrigerant shortage detection I : Refrigerant shortage is detected by checking the input current value and the compressor output frequency. If the refrigerant is short, the input current is smaller than the normal value. Refrigerant shortage detection II : Refrigerant shortage is detected by checking the discharge pipe temperature and the opening of the outdoor electronic expansion valve. If the refrigerant is short, the discharge pipe temperature tends to rise.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Refrigerant shortage detection I : The following conditions continue for 7 minutes. DC current ≤ A × Compressor output frequency + B Output frequency > C A (–)

Refrigerant shortage detection II : The following conditions continue for 80 seconds. Opening of the outdoor electronic expansion valve ≥ D Discharge pipe temperature > E × target discharge pipe temperature + F Cooling Heating

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Disconnection of the discharge pipe thermistor, indoor or outdoor heat exchanger thermistor, room or outdoor temperature thermistor Closed stop valve Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage) Poor compression performance of compressor Defective outdoor electronic expansion valve

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Any thermistor disconnected?

NO Check No.12 Refer to P.329

YES Replace the thermistor(s) in position. ∗ Discharge pipe thermistor ∗ Indoor or outdoor heat exchanger thermistor ∗ Room temperature thermistor ∗ Outdoor temperature thermistor YES Open the stop valve.

NO Check for refrigerant shortage.

Oil oozing at relay pipe connections?

YES Repair the pipe flare or replace the union.

NO Oil oozing at internal piping?

YES NO Compressor vibrating too much?

NO Check No. 12 Outdoor electronic expansion valve functioning?

YES Check the harness for loosening. Correct it as required. Also replace the cracked pipe. Check the pipes for improper contact. Correct them as required. Also replace the cracked pipe.

NO Replace the outdoor electronic expansion valve.

YES Change for a specified amount of fresh refrigerant.

Refrigerant shortage error again?

NO YES Check No. 01 Check the thermistors.

NG Replace the defective thermistor(s).

OK Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Replace the compressor.

NO Completed. Completed. (R17254)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Remote Controller Display Outdoor Unit LED Display Method of Malfunction Detection

U2 Aj 1i 2h 3h 4i 5h

Indoor Unit The zero-cross detection of the power supply is evaluated by the indoor unit PCB. Outdoor Unit Low-voltage detection: An abnormal voltage drop is detected by the DC voltage detection circuit. Over-voltage detection: An abnormal voltage rise is detected by the over-voltage detection circuit.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Indoor Unit There is no zero-cross detection in approximately 10 seconds. Outdoor Unit Low-voltage detection: The voltage detected by the DC voltage detection circuit is below 150 V for 0.1 second. If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error Over-voltage detection: An over-voltage signal is fed from the over-voltage detection circuit to the microcomputer. The compressor stops if the error occurs, and restarts automatically after 3-minute standby.

Supply voltage is not as specified. Defective DC voltage detection circuit Defective over-voltage detection circuit Defective PAM control part Disconnection of compressor harness Noise Momentary fall of voltage Momentary power failure Defective indoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the power supply voltage.

NO Correct the power supply.

YES Check the connection of the compressor harness.

Loose or disconnected?

YES Reconnect the harness.

NO (Precaution before turning on the power again) Make sure the power has been off for at least 30 seconds. Turn on the power again. System restarted?

YES Disturbance factors ∗ Noise ∗ Power supply distortion

Check for such factors for a long term. ∗ Try to restart a few times.

NO Repeat a few times. Error again within 3 minutes after turning on the power?

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Replace the indoor unit PCB. (R17269)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Signal Transmission Error (on Outdoor Unit PCB)

Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Communication error between microcomputer mounted on the main PCB and PM1.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The abnormality is determined when the data sent from the PM1 can not be received for 9 seconds. The error counter is reset when the data from the PM1 can be successfully received.

Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power and turn it on again.

NO YES Replace the outdoor unit PCB. The cause can be an external factor other than the malfunction. Observe the operating condition in long term. (R7185)

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Unspecified Voltage (between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit) / Anti-icing Function in Other Rooms

UA, UH Remote Controller Display Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A wrong connection is detected by checking the combination of indoor and outdoor units on the microcomputer.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Anti-icing function in other rooms Unspecified internal and/or external voltages Mismatching of indoor and outdoor units

Anti-icing function in other rooms Wrong models interconnected Wrong indoor unit PCB or outdoor unit PCB mounted

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Error displayed while operating?

NO The anti-icing function is activated in other rooms. Refer to A5.

YES Supply voltage as specified?

NO Correct the supply voltage.

YES Check the model combination.

NO Match the compatible models.

YES Check the combination of all the models being connected.

Refer to “Anti-icing function” on page 302 for detail.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

During cooling operation, indoor unit icing is detected by checking the temperatures sensed by the indoor heat exchanger thermistor and room temperature thermistor that are located in a shut-down room.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

In cooling operation, the both conditions (A) and (B) are met for 5 minutes. (A) Room temperature – Indoor heat exchanger temperature ≥ 10°C (B) Indoor heat exchanger temperature ≤ –1°C If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Wrong wiring or piping Defective outdoor electronic expansion valve Short-circuited air Defective indoor heat exchanger thermistor Defective room temperature thermistor

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Check No.12 Refer to P.329

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the wiring and piping.

Wrong wiring or piping?

YES Activate the wiring error check function.

NO Check No. 12 Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve.

NO Replace the outdoor electronic expansion valve or coil.

YES Check No. 01 Check the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

As described in the thermistor characteristic chart?

NO Replace the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

YES Check No. 01 Check the room temperature thermistor.

As described in the thermistor characteristic chart?

NO Replace the room temperature thermistor.

YES Change the refrigerant to remove moisture from the piping (after drawing a vacuum).

NO YES Replace the room temperature thermistor or indoor heat exchanger thermistor. Do the vacuum drying. Replace the indoor unit PCB and then start the wiring error check function. (R17255)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Outdoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Detect within the program of the microcomputer.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The program of the microcomputer is in abnormal running order.

Defective outdoor unit PCB Noise Momentary fall of voltage Momentary power failure

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

YES Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

NO Check to see that the unit is grounded.

YES NO Carry out grounding work.

The cause can be external factors other than malfunction. Investigate the cause of noise.

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A compressor overload is detected through compressor OL.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error ∗ The operating temperature condition is not specified.

Defective discharge pipe thermistor Defective outdoor electronic expansion valve or coil Defective four way valve or coil Defective outdoor unit PCB Refrigerant shortage Water mixed in refrigerant Defective stop valve

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Discharge pipe thermistor disconnected?

Check No.12 Refer to P.329

Insert the thermistor in position.

NO Check No. 01 Check the thermistors.

Check No.13 Refer to P.330

Check No.14 Refer to P.330

YES NG ∗ Discharge pipe thermistor

Replace the discharge pipe thermistor.

OK Check No. 12 Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve coil.

NG Replace the outdoor electronic expansion valve or the coil.

OK Check No. 13 Check the four way valve.

NG Replace the four way valve or the coil. Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

OK Check No. 14 Check the refrigerant line.

OK NG ∗ Refrigerant shortage ∗ Water mixed ∗ Stop valve

Refer to the refrigerant line check procedure. Replace the outdoor unit PCB. (R14438)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A compressor lock is detected by checking the compressor running condition through the position detection circuit.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

Judging from the current waveform generated when high-frequency voltage is applied to the compressor. If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Compressor locked Compressor harness disconnected

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.15 Refer to P.331

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged. (Precaution before turning on the power again) Make sure the power has been off for at least 30 seconds.

Turn off the power. Disconnect the harnesses U, V, and W. ∗ Inverter checker Check No.15 Part No.: 1225477 Check with the inverter checker (∗).

NO Correct the power supply or replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Turn off the power and reconnect the harnesses. Turn on the power again and restart the system.

Emergency stop without compressor running?

YES Replace the compressor.

NO System shut down after errors repeated several times?

YES NO Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve coil. Replace it as required. Replace the compressor. (R14439)

306 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

An error is determined with the high-voltage fan motor rotation speed detected by the Hall IC.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The fan does not start in 30 seconds even when the fan motor is running. If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Disconnection of the fan motor Foreign matter stuck in the fan Defective fan motor

Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.16 Refer to P.332

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Fan motor connector disconnected?

YES Turn off the power and reconnect the connector.

NO Foreign matter in or around the fan?

YES Remove the foreign matter.

NO Turn on the power.

Fan rotates smoothly?

NO Replace the outdoor fan motor.

YES Check No. 16 Check the rotation pulse input on the outdoor unit PCB.

Pulse signal generated?

YES NO Replace the outdoor fan motor. Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.10 Input Overcurrent Detection Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Detected by checking the input current value

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The input current is at a certain value (depending on the condition) for 2.5 seconds. The compressor halts if the error occurs, and restarts automatically after 3-minute standby.

Outdoor temperature is out of operation range. Defective compressor Defective power module Defective outdoor unit PCB Short circuit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.15 Refer to P.331

Check No.17 Refer to P.333

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

∗ An input overcurrent may result from wrong internal wiring. If the system is interrupted by an input overcurrent after the wires have been disconnected and reconnected for part replacement, check the wiring again. Check No. 17 Check the installation condition.

Start operation and measure the input current.

Check No.18 Refer to P.333 Input current flowing above its stop level?

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Turn off the power and disconnect the harnesses U, V, and W.

Check No. 15 Check with the inverter checker (∗).

∗ Inverter checker Part No.: 1225477

YES Correct the power supply or replace the outdoor unit PCB.

NO Turn off the power, and reconnect the harnesses. Turn on the power again and start operation.

Check No. 18 Check the discharge pressure. (R15325)

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.11 Discharge Pipe Temperature Control Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

Detected by the discharge pipe thermistor

Malfunction Decision Conditions

If the temperature detected by the discharge pipe thermistor rises above A °C, the compressor stops. The error is cleared when the discharge pipe temperature is dropped below B °C. 40/50/52/58 class

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Defective discharge pipe thermistor (Defective outdoor heat exchanger thermistor or outdoor temperature thermistor) Defective outdoor electronic expansion valve or coil Refrigerant shortage Defective four way valve Water mixed in refrigerant Defective stop valve

Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Check No.12 Refer to P.329

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check No. 01 Check the thermistors. OK Check No. 12 Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve.

Check No.14 Refer to P.330

NG ∗ Discharge pipe thermistor ∗ Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor ∗ Outdoor temperature thermistor

NG Replace the defective thermistor.

Replace the outdoor electronic expansion valve or the coil.

OK Check No. 14 Check the refrigerant line.

OK NG ∗ Refrigerant shortage ∗ Four way valve ∗ Water mixed ∗ Stop valve

Refer to the refrigerant line check procedure.

Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.12 High Pressure Control in Cooling Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

High-pressure control (operation halt, frequency drop, etc.) is activated in cooling mode if the temperature sensed by the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor exceeds the limit.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The temperature sensed by the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor rises above about 65°C. The error is cleared when the temperature drops below about 50°C.

The installation space is not large enough. Dirty outdoor heat exchanger Defective outdoor fan motor Defective stop valve Defective outdoor electronic expansion valve or coil Defective outdoor heat exchanger thermistor

Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Check No.12 Refer to P.329

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the installation space.

Check No. 17 Check the installation condition.

NG OK Check No.17 Refer to P.333

Check No. 19 Check the outdoor fan.

NG OK Check No.18 Refer to P.333

Check No. 18 Check the discharge pressure.

NG Change the installation location or direction. Clean the outdoor heat exchanger.

Replace the fan motor. Reconnect the connector or fan motor lead wires.

Replace the stop valve.

OK Check No.19 Refer to P.334

Check No. 12 Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve coil. OK Check No. 01 Check the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

NG NG Replace the outdoor electronic expansion valve or the coil. Replace the outdoor unit PCB. Replace the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

OK Replace the outdoor unit PCB. (R14413)

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.13 Compressor Sensor System Abnormality Remote Controller Display Outdoor Unit LED Display

H0 Aj 1i 2i 3h 4h 5h

Method of Malfunction Detection

Fault condition is identified by the supply voltage and the DC voltage which is detected before the compressor startup. Fault condition is identified by the compressor current which is detected right after the compressor startup. If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The detected value of the supply voltage and the DC voltage is obviously low or high. The compressor current does not run when the compressor is started.

Disconnection of reactor Disconnection of compressor harness Defective outdoor unit PCB Defective compressor

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Reactor connection check

NO Connect the reactor properly.

YES Compressor connection check

NO Connect the compressor properly.

YES Disconnect the reactor from the outdoor unit PCB and measure the resistance value between reactor terminals with tester.

YES Compressor check

10 Ω or less between each terminal?

YES Disconnect the compressor relay harness from the outdoor unit PCB and measure the resistance value between each terminal with a tester.

NO Replace the compressor or the compressor relay harness. Start the operation again and if the error appears again, replace the outdoor unit PCB. (R15891)

312 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.14 Position Sensor Abnormality Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A compressor startup failure is detected by checking the compressor running condition through the position detection circuit.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Disconnection of the compressor relay cable Defective compressor Defective outdoor unit PCB Start-up failure caused by the closed stop valve Input voltage is outside the specified range.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.15 Refer to P.331

Check No.18 Refer to P.333

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Check the power supply voltage.

NO Correct the power supply.

NO Replace the stop valve.

YES Check the connection.

Electrical components or compressor harnesses connected as specified?

NO Reconnect the electrical components or compressor harnesses as specified.

YES Turn on the power. Check the electrolytic capacitor voltage.

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Turn off the power. Disconnect the harnesses U, V, and W. ∗ Inverter checker Check No.15 Check with the inverter checker (∗). Part No.: 1225477

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.15 CT or Related Abnormality Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A CT or related error is detected by checking the compressor running frequency and CTdetected input current.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The compressor running frequency is more than A Hz and input current is less than B A. 40/50/52/58/68/75 class 80/90 class

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Defective power module Broken or disconnected wiring Defective reactor

Defective outdoor unit PCB Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Check No.15 Refer to P.331

Check No.21 Refer to P.334

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power and turn it on again.

∗ Running current as shown at right with relay cable 1 or 2?

YES Current (guideline)

Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Capacitor charged when the indoor unit or outdoor unit main relay turns on

NO Rising with increasing frequency

Check No. 21 Check the capacitor voltage. 2 sec

YES Turn off the power. Disconnect the harnesses U, V, and W.

∗ Inverter checker Part No.: 1225477

YES Correct the power supply or replace the outdoor unit PCB.

NO Turn off the power and reconnect the harnesses. Then turn on the power again and restart operation.

Compressor running? NO Voltage within the allowable range (Supply voltage ± 15%)?

NO YES YES Replace the outdoor unit PCB. Replace the compressor. Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.16 Thermistor or Related Abnormality (Outdoor Unit) Remote Controller Display

H9, J3, J6, J8, J9, P4

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

This type of error is detected by checking the thermistor input voltage to the microcomputer. A thermistor error is detected by checking the temperature sensed by each thermistor.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The thermistor input is above 4.96 V or below 0.04 V with the power on. J3 error is judged if the discharge pipe temperature is lower than the heat exchanger temperature. The system is shut down if all the units are judged as the J8 error.

Disconnection of the connector for the thermistor Defective thermistor corresponding to the error code Defective heat exchanger thermistor in the case of J3 error (outdoor heat exchanger thermistor in cooling operation, or indoor heat exchanger thermistor in heating operation)

Defective outdoor unit PCB Troubleshooting

In case of P4 Caution

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Replace the outdoor unit PCB. P4 : Radiation fin thermistor

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

In case of H9, J3, J6, J8, J9 Caution

Check No.01 Refer to P.325

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn on the power again.

Error displayed again on remote controller?

NO Reconnect the connectors or thermistors.

YES Check No. 01 Check the thermistor resistance value.

Normal? J3 error: The discharge pipe temperature is lower than the heat exchanger temperature. Cooling: Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor Heating: Indoor heat exchanger thermistor

NO Replace the defective thermistor(s). ∗ Outdoor temperature thermistor ∗ Discharge pipe thermistor ∗ Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor ∗ Liquid pipe thermistor ∗ Gas pipe thermistor

YES Check No. 01 Check the indoor heat exchanger thermistor resistance value in the heating operation.

Indoor heat exchanger thermistor functioning?

YES NO Replace the following thermistor. ∗ Indoor heat exchanger thermistor Replace the outdoor unit PCB. (R17164)

H9 : Outdoor temperature thermistor J3 : Discharge pipe thermistor J6 : Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor J8 : Liquid pipe thermistor J9 : Gas pipe thermistor

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.17 Electrical Box Temperature Rise Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

An electrical box temperature rise is detected by checking the radiation fin thermistor with the compressor off.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

With the compressor off, the radiation fin temperature is above A °C. The error is cleared when the temperature drops below B °C. To cool the electrical components, the outdoor fan starts when the radiation fin temperature rises above C °C and stops when it drops below B °C. A (°C) 100

Defective outdoor fan motor Short circuit Defective radiation fin thermistor Disconnection of connector

Defective outdoor unit PCB Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.17 Refer to P.333

Check No.19 Refer to P.334

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged. WARNING To cool the electrical components, the outdoor fan starts when the radiation fin temperature rises above C ˚C and stops when it drops below B ˚C.

Turn off the power and turn it on again.

YES Error again or outdoor fan activated?

NO Check the radiation fin temperature.

YES Check No. 19 Check the outdoor fan or related.

Radiation fin dirty?

Clean up the radiation fin.

Slightly dirty Check No. 17 Check the installation condition. (R14416)

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.18 Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

A radiation fin temperature rise is detected by checking the radiation fin temperature with the compressor on.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

The radiation fin temperature with the compressor on is above A °C. The error is cleared when the temperature drops below B °C 40/50/52/58/68/75 class 80/90 class

If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error

Defective outdoor fan motor Short circuit Defective radiation fin thermistor Disconnection of connector Defective outdoor unit PCB Silicon grease is not applied properly on the radiation fin after replacing the outdoor unit PCB.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.17 Refer to P.333

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

Turn off the power and turn it on again to start the system.

Check No.19 Refer to P.334

YES Error displayed again?

Has the PCB been replaced?

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Check No. 19 Check the outdoor fan or related.

NG Replace the outdoor fan motor. Correct the connectors and fan motor leads. Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

Radiation fin dirty?

Clean up the radiation fin.

Slightly dirty Check No. 17 Check the installation condition.

Refer to “Application of silicon grease to a power transistor and a diode bridge” on page 423 for detail.

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

7.19 Output Overcurrent Detection Remote Controller Display

Outdoor Unit LED Display

Method of Malfunction Detection

An output overcurrent is detected by checking the current that flows in the inverter DC section.

Malfunction Decision Conditions

A position signal error occurs while the compressor is running. A speed error occurs while the compressor is running. An output overcurrent signal is fed from the output overcurrent detection circuit to the microcomputer. If the error repeats, the system is shut down. Reset condition: Continuous run for about 5 minutes without any other error

Poor installation condition Closed stop valve Defective power module Wrong internal wiring Abnormal power supply voltage Defective outdoor unit PCB Defective compressor

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting for Outdoor Unit

Troubleshooting Caution

Check No.15 Refer to P.331

Check No.17 Refer to P.333

Check No.18 Refer to P.333

Check No.22 Refer to P.335

Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.

∗ An output overcurrent may result from wrong internal wiring. If the system is interrupted by an output overcurrent after the wires have been disconnected and reconnected for part replacement, check the wiring again. Check No. 17 Check the installation condition.

NO Stop valve fully open?

Fully open the stop valve.

YES Turn off the power and turn it on again to start the system. See if the same error occurs.

NO Monitor the power supply voltage, discharge and suction pressures, and other factors for a long term.

YES Possible causes ∗ Momentary fall of power supply voltage ∗ Compressor overload ∗ Short circuit

Turn off the power and disconnect the harnesses U, V, and W.

Check the connectors and other components.

∗ Inverter checker Part No.: 1225477

Check No. 15 Check with the inverter checker (∗).

YES Correct the power supply or replace the outdoor unit PCB.

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Turn off the power, and reconnect the harnesses. Turn on the power again and start operation.

Check the supply voltage.

NO Correct the power supply.

YES Short circuit or wire breakage between compressor's coil phases?

YES Replace the compressor.

Disconnect the connectors of the thermistors from the PCB, and measure the resistance of each thermistor using tester. The relationship between normal temperature and resistance is shown in the table and the graphs below. The data is for reference purpose only.

Thermistor temperature (°C)

Resistance (kΩ) Room temperature thermistor for FTXS-K and CTXS-K series Other thermistors

Resistance range Tester (R3460) (R11906)

The room temperature thermistor is directly mounted on the display PCB. Remove the display PCB from the control PCB to measure the resistance. When the indoor heat exchanger thermistor is soldered on the PCB, remove the thermistor and measure the resistance.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FTXS-K, CTXS-K Series Fan motor wire breakdown / short circuit check 1. Check the connector for connection. 2. Turn the power off. 3. Check if each resistance at the phases U - V and V - W is 90 Ω ~ 100 Ω (between the pins 12 - 9, and between 9 - 6). Motor control voltage check 1. Check the connector for connection. 2. Check the motor control voltage is generated (between the pins 2 - 3). Rotation pulse check 1. Check the connector for connection. 2. Turn the power on and stop the operation. 3. Check if the Hall IC generates the rotation pulse 4 times when the fan motor is manually rotated once (between the pins 1 - 3).

FLXS, FDXS Series 1. Check the connector connection. 2. With the power on, operation off, and the connector connected, check the following. ∗Output voltage of about 5 V between pins 1 and 3. ∗Generation of 3 pulses between pins 2 and 3 when the fan motor is operating. If NG in step 1 Defective PCB Replace the PCB. If NG in step 2 Defective Hall IC Replace the fan motor. If OK in both steps 1 and 2 Replace the PCB. S7 1

Blue (grounding) (R14211)

Indoor Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check

Conduct the followings to check the indoor electronic expansion valve coil (EV). 1. Check to see if the EV connector is correctly connected to the PCB. 2. Turn the power off and on again, and check to see if the EV generate latching sound. 3. If the EV does not generate latching sound in the above step 2, disconnect the connector and check the continuity using a tester. 4. Check the continuity between the pins 1 - 6, 2 - 6, 3 - 6, and 4 - 6. If there is no continuity between the pins, the EV coil is faulty.

Harness 5P S50 (relay connector)

(5) 6P Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6

6-1 6-2 Check 6-3 6-4 (R15307)

5. If the continuity is confirmed in the above step 3, the PCB is faulty. Note:

Please note that the latching sound varies depending on the valve type.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Measure the power supply waveform between No. 1 and No. 2 on the terminal board, and check the waveform disturbance. Check to see if the power supply waveform is a sine wave (Fig.1). Check to see if there is waveform disturbance near the zero cross (sections circled in Fig.2) [Fig.1]

Conduct the followings to check the outdoor electronic expansion valve (EV). 1. Check to see if the EV connector is correctly inserted in the PCB. Match the EV unit number and the connector number. 2. Turn the power off and on again, and check to see if all the EVs generate latching sound. 3. If any of the EVs does not generate latching sound in the above step 2, disconnect that connector and check the continuity using a tester. Check the continuity between the pins 1 - 6 and 3 - 6, and between the pins 2 - 5 and 4 - 5. If there is no continuity between the pins, the EV coil is faulty. 4. If no EV generates latching sound in the above step 2, the outdoor unit PCB is faulty. 5. If the continuity is confirmed in the above step 3, mount a good coil (which generated latching sound) in the EV unit that did not generate latching sound, and check to see if that EV generates latching sound. ∗If latching sound is generated, the outdoor unit PCB is faulty. ∗If latching sound is not generated, the EV unit is faulty. Note:

Please note that the latching sound varies depending on the valve type. If the system keeps operating with a defective outdoor electronic expansion valve, the following problem may occur. Valve opening position Open

Cooling: Reset power supply and conduct cooling operation Flowing noise of refrigerant in the unit by unit. unit which is not in operation Water leakage at the unit which is Check the liquid pipe temperature not in operation of no-operation unit. Operation half due to anti-icing function Heating: Flowing noise of refrigerant in the unit which is not in operation The unit does not heat the room.

Almost the same as the outdoor temperature?

YES NO The EV is not defective. Replace the EV of the room. (R16019)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cooling: Reset power supply and conduct cooling operation The problem unit does not cool unit by unit. the room. Only the problem unit is in Check the low pressure. operation, the unit starts pump down. (The low pressure of the unit becomes vacuum.) Does the pressure NO Abnormal discharge pipe The EV is not become into vacuum defective. temperature zone? Heating: YES Replace the EV Refrigerant shortage due to of the room. stagnation of liquid refrigerant (R16020) inside the faulty indoor unit The unit does not heat the room. Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Four Way Valve Performance Check

Check No.13 Turn off the power and turn it on again.

Start heating operation.

S80 voltage at 220 - 240 VAC with compressor on? (Fig. 1)

∗ Four way valve coil Cooling / Dry : No continuity Heating : Continuity

NO Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

YES Disconnect the four way valve coil from the connector and check the continuity.

Four way valve coil resistance at 1000 ~ 2000 Ω?

NO Replace the four way valve coil.

YES Replace the four way valve. (R11903)

(Fig. 1) Voltage at S80

Is the discharge pipe thermistor disconnected from the holder?

YES Reconnect the thermistor.

NO Check for refrigerant leakage. See the section on refrigerant shortage detection.

Characteristics If abnormal stop occurs due to compressor startup failure or overcurrent output when using an inverter unit, it is difficult to judge whether the stop is caused by the compressor failure or some other failure (control PCB, power module, etc.). The inverter checker makes it possible to judge the cause of trouble easily and securely. (Connect this checker as a quasi-compressor instead of the compressor and check the output of the inverter.) Operation Method Step 1 Be sure to turn the power off. Step 2 Install the inverter checker instead of a compressor. Note: Make sure the charged voltage of the built-in smoothing electrolytic capacitor drops to 10 VDC or below before carrying out the service work. (1) Remove the terminals from the compressor.

(2) Connect the terminals to the terminals of the inverter checker.

Be careful not to let the terminals (U,V,W) touch each other. Otherwise, high voltage is applied. (R13940)

Reference: If the terminals of the compressor are not FASTON terminals (difficult to remove the wire on the terminals), it is possible to connect wires available on site to the outdoor unit from output side of PCB. (Do not connect them to the compressor at the same time, otherwise it may result in incorrect detection.) Step 3 Activate the power transistor test operation from the outdoor unit. 1) Press the forced operation [ON/OFF] switch for 5 seconds. (Refer to page 405 for the position.) → Power transistor test operation starts.

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Diagnose method (Diagnose according to 6 LEDs lighting status.) (1) If all the LEDs are lit uniformly, the compressor is defective. → Replace the compressor. (2) If the LEDs are not lit uniformly, check the power module. → Refer to Check No.22. (3) If NG in Check No.22, replace the power module. (Replace the main PCB. The power module is united with the main PCB.) If OK in Check No.22, check if there is any solder cracking on the PCB. (4) If any solder cracking is found, replace the PCB or repair the soldered section. If there is no solder cracking, replace the PCB. Caution (1) When the output frequency is low, the LEDs blink slowly. As the output frequency increases, the LEDs blink quicker. (The LEDs look like they are lit.) (2) On completion of the inverter checker diagnosis, be sure to re-crimp the FASTON terminals. Otherwise, the terminals may be burned due to loosening. Direction of crimp This size is shortened by “crimp”.

FASTON terminal (R5161)

8.10 Rotation Pulse Check on the Outdoor Unit PCB Check No.16

<Outdoor fan motor> Make sure that the voltage of 320 ± 30 V is applied. 1. Set operation off and power off. Disconnect the connector S70. 2. Check that the voltage between the pins 4 - 7 is 320 VDC. 3. Check that the control voltage between the pins 3 - 4 is 15 VDC. 4. Check that the rotation command voltage between the pins 2 - 4 is 0 ~ 15 VDC. 5. Keep operation off and power off. Connect the connector S70. 6. Check whether 2 pulses (0 ~ 15 VDC) are output at the pins 1 - 4 when the fan motor is rotated 1 turn by hand. When the fuse is melted, check the outdoor fan motor for proper function. If NG in step 2 → Defective PCB → Replace the PCB. If NG in step 4 → Defective Hall IC → Replace the outdoor fan motor. If OK in both steps 2 and 4 → Replace the PCB. PCB S70 1

Actual rotating pulse output (0 ~ 15 VDC)

8.11 Installation Condition Check Check No.17 Installation condition check

Check the allowable dimensions of the air suction and discharge area.

NG Change the installation location or direction.

OK Is the discharged air short-circuited?

YES Change the installation location or direction.

NO Is the outdoor heat exchanger very dirty?

YES Clean the outdoor heat exchanger.

NO Is the airflow blocked by obstacles or winds blowing in the opposite direction?

YES NO Change the installation location or direction.

Check the outdoor temperature. (The outdoor temperature should be within operation range.) (R17119)

8.12 Discharge Pressure Check Check No.18 Discharge pressure check

YES Is the stop valve open?

NO Open the stop valve.

YES Is the connection pipe deformed?

YES Replace the pipe installed at the site.

NO Is the air filter or indoor/outdoor heat exchanger dirty? Not dirty

Clean the dirty air filter or indoor/outdoor heat exchanger. Replace the compressor. (R15738)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8.13 Outdoor Fan System Check Check No.19 Check the outdoor unit fan system.

Outdoor unit fan running?

NO YES Outdoor unit fan system functioning.

Fan motor lead wire connector disconnected?

YES Reconnect the connector.

NO Go to Check No. 16. (R15128)

8.14 Capacitor Voltage Check Check No.21

Before this check, be sure to check the main circuit for short circuit. With the circuit breaker still on, measure the voltage according to the drawing of the model in question. Be careful never to touch any live parts.

8.15 Power Module Check Check No.22 Note:

Check to make sure that the voltage between (+) and (–) of the power module (PM1) is approx. 0 V before checking. Disconnect the compressor harness connector from the outdoor unit PCB. To disengage the connector, press the protrusion on the connector. Follow the procedure below to measure resistance between the terminals of the power module and the terminals of the compressor with a multi-tester. Evaluate the measurement results referring to the following table. Negative (–) terminal of Power module (+) UVW Power module (–) UVW tester (positive terminal (+) for digital tester) Positive (+) terminal of UVW Power module (+) UVW Power module (–) tester (negative terminal (–) for digital tester) Resistance is OK. Resistance is NG.

several kΩ ~ several MΩ 0 Ω or ∞

∗ The illustration is for 40/50/52/58 class as representative. Power module (PM1)

Service Diagnosis Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class367 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

Removal of Outer Panels 367 Removal of Electrical Box 382 Removal of PCBs 388 Removal of Fan Motor392 Removal of Coils / Thermistors 393 Removal of Sound Blankets 399 Removal of Compressor402

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

1. Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class Note: The illustrations are for heat pump models as representative.

Removal of Outer Panels

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

Take care not to cut your finger by the fins of the heat exchanger.

Remove the 4 screws (2 on both sides) of the top panel.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Remove the 6 screws of the front panel.

Remove the screw of the shield plate.

Slide the shield plate to the left to unfasten the hooks and remove the shield plate.

Align the position of hole of the upper hook to pull the front panel out.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Lift the front panel up to unfasten the left side hooks.

The front panel has 3 hooks on the left.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Remove the 2 screws of the stop valve cover. Stop valve cover

Slide the stop valve cover downward and remove it.

When reassembling, make sure to fit the 5 hooks.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Electrical Box

1. Disconnect the harnesses. 1 Layout of the connecting wires

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

The illustrations are for 3room models as representative, 4-room models also have D port.

A port B port C port Electronic expansion valve coil (R11175)

Gas stop valve Liquid stop valve (R11176)

The wires are fixed to the terminal board with screws.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Detach the fixing tape of the electrical box cover.

Unfasten the 4 hooks at the mark of the electrical box cover.

Lift the electrical box cover up and remove it.

When reassembling, insert the clamp into the either hole as below.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Release the fan motor lead wire from the hooks.

Disconnect the connectors for the electronic expansion valve coils.

[S20] (white) : room A [S21] (red) : room B [S22] (blue) : room C

4-room models also have [S23] (yellow) for room D.

When reassembling, insert the clamp of the electronic expansion valve coil ASSY into either hole as below.

Electronic expansion valve coil (R17170)

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Disconnect the connector for the overload protector [S40].

The wire harness for the compressor is attached to the partition plate by the clamp.

Partition plate Clamp (R12904)

Pull out the clamp with pliers.

Disconnect the relay connector of the compressor.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Disconnect the each connector.

When reassembling, insert each clamp of the thermistor harnesses into the holes as below. [S92] [S93] [S90] (R17169)

Disconnect the connector for the four way valve coil [S80].

The cooling only models have no harness for [S80].

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

The figure shows the arrangement of the wire harnesses under the electrical box.

Pull out the clamp of the thermistor lead wire.

When reassembling, insert the clamp into the small hole.

Thermistor lead wire

Fixing position for the thermistor harness

Remove the screws on the terminal board and disconnect all the connecting wires and power supply wire.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Remove the 2 screws and remove the wiring fixture. Wiring fixture

Detach the outdoor temperature thermistor.

Remove the screw on the right side of the electrical box.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Remove the screw of the electrical box.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

1. Remove the service monitor PCB. 1 External appearance

Service monitor PCB Points Terminal board

Remove the screw of the terminal board and open it.

Disconnect the connectors [S52] [S102] from the service monitor PCB.

Service monitor PCB Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Unfasten the upper hook and pull the service monitor PCB upward to remove.

Refer to page 40 for detail.

2. Remove the main PCB. 1 Disconnect the connectors for the terminal board on the right side.

[AC1] [AC2] : for power supply [S10] : for transmission

Disconnect the 2 connectors for the reactor on the left side.

Remove the 3 screws of the main PCB. Main PCB

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Unfasten the 3 hooks on the reactor side and slide the main PCB to the left.

Release the relay harness for the compressor from the hook.

Lift up the main PCB and remove it.

In working, be careful not to break the main PCB with the excessive force because the main PCB and the radiation fin are adhered to one another.

Relay harness for compressor

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Refer to page 39 for detail. [S70]

Remove the 2 screws of the radiation fin.

Clamp for reactor harness

When reassembling, make sure to use the silicon grease. Silicon grease Part No.: 1172698

Radiation fin (R5553)

Remove the 3 screws of the reactor.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

3. Remove the terminal board. 1 Disconnect all the wire harnesses from the back of the terminal board.

Terminal board (back) (R12907)

Unfasten the hook of the electrical box and remove the terminal board.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Outdoor Fan / Fan Motor

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

Preparation Remove the outer panels and plates. Remove the electrical box.

Remove the 2 screws of the fan motor fixing plate.

Fan motor fixing plate

When reassembling, fit the lower hooks. Nut size: M6 (R5561)

Remove the nut and remove the outdoor fan.

When reassembling, align the mark of the outdoor fan with the D-cut section of the motor shaft.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

When reassembling, put the fan motor lead wire through the back of the fan motor so as not to be entangled with the outdoor fan.

Open the 2 hooks and release the fan motor lead wire. Hook

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Sound Blankets

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

1. Remove the right side panel. 1 Remove the 3 screws of the right side panel.

Preparation Remove the outer panels and plates.

Remove the 2 screws on the back.

Remove the protection rubber. There is a hook on the back.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Lift up and remove the right side panel.

2. Remove the partition plate. 1 Remove the 2 screws of the partition plate.

Detach the clamp of the relay harness for the compressor.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Lift up and remove the partition plate.

When reassembling, make sure to fit the lower hook of the partition plate.

3. Remove the sound blankets. 1 Remove the sound blanket (top upper).

Since the piping ports on the sound blanket are torn easily, remove the blanket carefully. The shape of the sound blankets differs depending on the model.

Remove the sound blanket (top inner).

Sound blanket (top inner)

358 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Open the sound blanket (outer) and pull it out.

Open the sound blanket (inner) and pull it out.

Sound blanket (inner) (R5584)

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Coils / Thermistors

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

1. Remove the electronic expansion valve coils. 1 Pull out the electronic expansion valve coils. Electronic expansion valve coil

2. Remove the four way valve coil. 1 Remove the screw to remove the four way valve coil.

Cooling only models have no four way valve coil. Four way valve coil

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

3. Remove the thermistors. 1 Open the putty and remove the liquid pipe thermistors.

When reassembling, meet the edge of the thermistor and the fixture.

Liquid pipe thermistor

Pull out the gas pipe thermistors.

Cut the clamp. Pull out the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Be careful not to lose the clip. The positions of the clamp and outdoor heat exchanger thermistor differ depending on the model.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

When reassembling, meet the edge of the thermistor and the fixture.

Remove the assembly of thermistors.

Outdoor temperature thermistor

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Distributor

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

Remove the putty. Warning Be careful not to get yourself burnt with the pipes and other parts that are heated by the gas brazing machine.

Before working, make sure that the refrigerant gas is empty in the circuit. Be sure to apply nitrogen replacement when heating up the brazed part. 2 Heat up and disconnect the brazed parts to remove the distributor.

Note: Do not use a metal saw for cutting pipes by all means because the sawdust comes into the circuit. When withdrawing the pipes, be careful not to pinch them firmly with pliers. The pipes may get deformed.

Cautions for restoration 1. Restore the piping by nonoxidation brazing. 2. It is required to prevent the carbonization of the oil inside the four way valve and the deterioration of the gaskets affected by heat. (Keep below 120°C.) For the sake of this, wrap the four way valve with wet cloth and provide water so that the cloth does not dry. In case of difficulty with gas brazing machine 1. Disconnect the brazed part where is easy to disconnect and restore. 2. Cut pipes on the main unit with a tube cutter in order to make it easy to disconnect.

Provide a protective sheet or a steel plate so that the brazing flame cannot influence peripheries.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Four Way Valve

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

Cooling only models have no four way valve coil.

Before working, make sure that the refrigerant gas is empty in the circuit. Be sure to apply nitrogen replacement when heating up the brazed part. 1 Remove the screw to remove the four way valve coil.

Warning Be careful not to get yourself burnt with the pipes and other parts that are heated by the gas brazing machine.

Heat up the 4 brazed part of the four way valve. First, disconnect the part (a).

Disconnect the part (b).

Disconnect the part (c) and (d) and remove the four way valve. Note: Do not use a metal saw for cutting pipes by all means because the sawdust comes into the circuit.

When withdrawing the pipes, be careful not to pinch them firmly with pliers. The pipes may get deformed.

Warning If the refrigerant gas leaks during work, ventilate the room. (If the refrigerant gas is exposed to flames, toxic gas may be generated.) Caution From the viewpoint of global environment protection, do not discharge the refrigerant gas in the atmosphere. Make sure to collect all the refrigerant gas. Cautions for restoration 1. Restore the piping by nonoxidation brazing. 2. It is required to prevent the carbonization of the oil inside the four way valve and the deterioration of the gaskets affected by heat. (Keep below 120°C.) For the sake of this, wrap the four way valve with wet cloth and provide water so that the cloth does not dry. In case of difficulty with gas brazing machine 1. Disconnect the brazed part where is easy to disconnect and restore. 2. Cut pipes on the main unit with a tube cutter in order to make it easy to disconnect.

Provide a protective sheet or a steel plate so that the brazing flame cannot influence peripheries.

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Removal of Compressor

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work.

Remove the terminal cover.

Disconnect the compressor lead wires. V(yellow)

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 40-75 Class

Warning Be careful not to get yourself burnt with the pipes and other parts that are heated by the gas brazing machine.

Remove the putty. Remove the 2 nuts.

Before working, make sure that the refrigerant gas is empty in the circuit. Be sure to apply nitrogen replacement when heating up the brazed part. 6 Heat up the brazed part of the discharge side and disconnect the part (a). 7 Heat up the brazed part of the suction side and disconnect the part (b). 8 Remove the compressor.

Note: Do not use a metal saw for cutting pipes by all means because the sawdust comes into the circuit.

When withdrawing the pipes, be careful not to pinch them firmly with pliers. The pipes may get deformed. Provide a protective sheet or a steel plate so that the brazing flame cannot influence peripheries.

Warning If the refrigerant gas leaks during work, ventilate the room. (If the refrigerant gas is exposed to flames, toxic gas may be generated.) Warning Since it may happen that the refrigerant oil in the compressor catches fire, prepare wet cloth so as to extinguish fire immediately. Caution From the viewpoint of global environment protection, do not discharge the refrigerant gas in the atmosphere. Make sure to collect all the refrigerant gas. Cautions for restoration 1. Restore the piping by nonoxidation brazing. 2. It is required to prevent the carbonization of the oil inside the four way valve and the deterioration of the gaskets affected by heat. (Keep below 120°C.) For the sake of this, wrap the four way valve with wet cloth and provide water so that the cloth does not dry. In case of difficulty with gas brazing machine 1. Disconnect the brazed part where is easy to disconnect and restore. 2. Cut pipes on the main unit with a tube cutter in order to make it easy to disconnect.

Be careful so as not to burn the compressor terminals, the name plate, the heat exchanger fin.

366 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

2. Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class Note: The illustrations are for heat pump models as representative.

Removal of Outer Panels

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

The hooks are secured in the clearances of the outdoor heat exchanger fins.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Slide the suction grille downward to unfasten the 3 top hooks.

2. Remove the top panel. 1 Remove the 4 screws on the back and the screw on the left side panel.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the 2 screws on the front and the screw on the right side panel.

Lift the top panel and remove it.

3. Remove the right side panel. 1 Remove the 5 screws.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Slide the right side panel downward to unfasten the 2 hooks on the back side.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the right side panel.

4. Remove the front panel (2). 1 Remove the 2 screws.

This screw is M5 × 16

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Slide the front panel (2) downward to unfasten the hook.

Remove the front panel (2).

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the discharge grille and outdoor fan first to remove the front panel (1). Front Panel (1)

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Slide the discharge grille downward to unfasten the 2 hooks at the top.

Remove the nut and remove the outdoor fan.

When reassembling, align mark of the outdoor fan with D-cut section of the motor shaft.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the 2 screws on the partition plate (1).

Points Partition plate (1)

Remove the screw at the bottom left of the front panel (1).

Remove the screw at the bottom of the left side.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the screw at the bottom of the back side.

The front panel (1) has a hook. Lift the front panel (1).

Remove the front panel (1).

Be sure to detach the front panel (1) carefully so as not to deform it.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

6. Remove the rear panel. 1 Remove the screw on the partition plate (2).

Slide the partition plate (2) to the left and remove it.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the 5 screws on the wire fixing plate (upper).

Wire fixing plate (upper)

Remove the wire fixing plate (upper).

Remove the 3 screws on the wire fixing plate (lower).

Wire fixing plate (lower)

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the wire fixing plate (lower).

Pull out the holder of the outdoor temperature thermistor.

Release the thermistor wire from the groove

The holder is secured in the clearances of the outdoor heat exchanger fins.

Outdoor temperature thermistor

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the 3 screws on the rear panel.

Remove the screw on the stop valve mounting plate.

Stop valve mounting plate

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Lift the rear panel upward to unfasten the 2 hooks.

Remove the rear panel.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Removal of Electrical Box

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

: When reassembling, do not use these 2 hooks.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Disconnect the connector for the four way valve coil [S80].

Pull out the clamp. The cooling only model has no harness for [S80].

Disconnect the connectors for the electronic expansion valve coil. [S20] (white): room A [S21] (red): room B [S22] (blue): room C

[S23] (yellow): room D A B C Pull out the clamp. 5-room models also has [S24] (green) for room E. When reassembling, insert each clamp into the small hole.

For the electronic expansion valve coil [S93]

Disconnect the connector for the liquid pipe thermistor [S93].

Pull out the clamp. [S93]

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Disconnect the connector for the gas pipe thermistor [S92].

Pull out the clamp. When reassembling, insert the clamp into the small hole.

Disconnect the connector for the thermistors [S90].

When reassembling, insert the clamp of the thermistor ASSY into the hole as below.

The wire harness of the thermistor is hooked under the electrical box. Unhook it and pull out the clamp.

When reassembling, insert the clamp into the small hole.

Fixing position for the thermistor harness

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Disconnect the connector for the overload protector [S40].

The wire harness for the compressor is attached to the partition plate (1) by the clamp.

Partition plate Clamp (R12904)

Pull out the clamp with pliers.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Disconnect the relay connector of the compressor.

Remove the screw on the stop valve mounting plate.

Stop valve mounting plate

Remove the screw on the partition plate (1).

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Slide the electrical box leftward to unfasten the hook on the right side of the electrical box.

Lift up the electrical box and remove it.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

1. Remove the main PCB. 1 Remove the cover of the electrical box.

Release the 4 hooks. The hooks are marked with .

Remove the 3 screws. Main PCB

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Disconnect the connectors.

U(red) V(yellow) W(blue) [S51] [S101] [S10]

[AC2] (blue) [AC1] (brown)

[S51] [S101] : service monitor PCB [S10] : terminal board (transmission) [HR1] [HR2] : reactor [AC1] [AC2] : terminal board (power supply) [U] [V] [W] : compressor Refer to page 40 for detail.

Remove the main PCB.

2. Remove the reactor. 1 Remove the screw.

Remove the 3 screws and lift the reactor upward to remove it.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

3. Remove the service monitor PCB. 1 Disconnect the connectors [S52] [S102] from the service monitor PCB.

Slightly lift the top hook to detach.

Refer to page 40 for detail.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

4. Remove the terminal board. 1 Remove the screw. Terminal board

Remove the terminal board.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Removal of Fan Motor

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

Remove the 2 lower screws of the fan motor.

Remove the 2 upper screws.

Be sure to remove the lower screws first. If the upper screws are removed first, the fan motor may tilt or fall because the center of its gravity is toward the front. It may cause injuries.

When reassembling, be sure to place the wire harness lower.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Removal of Coils / Thermistors

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Procedure

1. Remove the electronic expansion valve coils. 1 Pull out the electronic expansion valve coils.

Electronic expansion valve coil

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

2. Remove the thermistors. 1 Pull out the gas pipe thermistors.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Peel off the putty and pull out the liquid pipe thermistors.

Pull out the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

Outdoor heat exchanger thermistor

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Be careful not to lose the clip.

Remove the clip from the outdoor heat exchanger thermistor.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

3. Remove the four way valve coil. 1 Remove the screw.

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the four way valve coil.

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Removal of Sound Blankets

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work.

The sound blanket is fragile. Carefully pass the blanket through the discharge pipe.

Sound blanket (top upper) (R10434)

Remove the screw from the partition plate and push the plate to the left slightly for easy work.

Partition plate (R10435)

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the sound blanket (top inner).

The sound blanket is fragile.

Sound blanket (outer)

The sound blanket is fragile. Carefully pass the blanket through the discharge pipe.

Sound blanket (top inner)

Open the sound blanket (inner) and pass it through the part of the mufflers.

The sound blanket is fragile. Be careful of the notches of the compressor mount (3 locations).

Mufflers Sound blanket (inner) (R10438)

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Remove the sound blanket (inner).

Removal Procedure Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Outdoor Unit: 80/90 Class

Removal of Compressor

Be sure to wait for 10 minutes or more after turning off all power supplies before disassembling work. Points

Remove the terminal cover. Terminal cover

Disconnect the compressor lead wires. Remove the overload protector.

U : red, V : yellow, W : blue

U(red) W(blue) V(yellow)

Disconnect the pipings, referring to page 366.

Part 8 Trial Operation and Field Settings 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. Field Settings 412 5.1 Outdoor Unit 412 5.2 RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series415 5.3 SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series 419

6. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge 423

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Pump Down Operation Outline

In order to protect the environment, be sure to conduct pump down operation when relocating or disposing the unit.

1) Remove the valve caps from the liquid stop valve and the gas stop valve. 2) Carry out forced cooling operation. 3) After 5 to 10 minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a hexagonal wrench. 4) After 2 to 3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop the forced cooling operation. Close

Refer to page 405 for forced operation.

404 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Trial Operation and Field Settings

2. Forced Operation Outline

Forced operation mode includes forced cooling and forced heating. Operation mode can be selected by the operation mode switch (SW2) on the outdoor unit. Press the forced operation [ON/OFF] switch (SW1) on the outdoor unit to start the operation.

Detail Item Conditions

1) The indoor unit is not abnormal, but the indoor unit which is not in the freezing prohibiting zone is present in more than 1 room. 2) The outdoor unit is not abnormal and not in the 3-minute standby mode.

1) The indoor unit is not abnormal. The indoor unit which is not in the peak-cut prohibited zone is present in more than 1 room. ←

3) The operating mode of the outdoor ← unit is the stop mode. 4) The operation mode switch (SW2) on 4) The operation mode switch (SW2) on the outdoor unit is set to the cooling the outdoor unit is set to the heating mode. mode. Start Operating room

Press the forced operation [ON/OFF] switch (SW1) on the outdoor unit. All rooms: The command is sent to all the rooms where the transmission is normal.

← Only 1 room: The command is sent to one of the rooms which can be operate and the order of priority is A > B > C > D > E. Other rooms operation must be stopped.

(Outdoor temperature : 2°C) • 40/50/52/58 class : 42 Hz • 68/75 class : 35 Hz • 80/90 class : 26 Hz 1) Press the forced operation [ON/OFF] ← switch (SW1) on the outdoor unit again.

2) The operation ends automatically 2) The operation ends automatically after 15 minutes. after 60 minutes. The protection functions are prior to all ← others in the forced operation.

Service monitor PCB Operation mode switch (SW2)

Forced operation [ON/OFF] switch (SW1)

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The convenient wiring error check function is designed for the microcomputer to correct wiring errors itself. If local wiring is unclear in the case of buried piping, for example, just press the wiring error check switch that is behind the stop valve cover of the outdoor unit. Even if the connections for Room A and Room B are confused, the system may run without a hassle. Note that this check function does not work in the following cases. For about 1 minute after the power is turned on (during initial setup). For 3-minute standby period after the compressor has stopped. When the outdoor temperature is below 5°C. If the indoor unit is in trouble (also in case of all-room transmission failure). When the piping and wiring are perfect, there is no need to use this function.

1. Remove the stop valve cover. 2. Press the wiring error check switch (SW3) on the service monitor PCB of the outdoor unit, and the wiring error check function is activated. 3. In about 10 ~ 20 minutes, the check finishes automatically. 4. When the check is over, the service monitor LED indicators start blinking. LED Status

All blinking at once Blinking one after another

Judgment Self-correction impossible Self-correction complete

Self-correction complete…The LED indicators 1 ~ 3 (3-room model), 1 ~ 4 (4-room model), or 1~5 (5-room model) blink one after another. Self-correction impossible…The LED indicators blink all at the same time. ∗ Transmission failure occurs at any of the indoor units. ∗ The indoor unit heat exchanger thermistor is disconnected. ∗ An indoor unit is in trouble (if a trouble occurs during the wiring error checking). Emergency stop…Any of the LED indicators stays on. Note:

1. It takes about 10 ~ 20 minutes (after pressing the wiring error check switch) to complete the checking. 2. Wrongly connected liquid and gas pipes cannot be self-corrected. Be sure to make the liquid pipe and the gas pipe in pairs. 3. To cancel the wiring error check procedure halfway, press the wiring error check switch again. In this case, the memory of the microcomputer returns to its initial status (Room A wiring → Port A piping, Room B wiring → Port B piping). 4. When replacing the outdoor unit PCB, be sure to use this function. 5. Make the power side setting after doing the wiring error check. (Otherwise, if the wiring is reversed, the air-conditioners being connected are set up in the reverse way.)

Service monitor PCB Wiring error check switch (SW3)

Trial Operation and Field Settings

Wiring Error Check Function

Refrigerant flows from Port A and on. The temperatures of the indoor heat exchanger thermistors are detected one by one to check up the matching between the piping and wiring. With this function on, freezing (crackling) noise may be heard from the indoor unit. This is not a problem. (This is because the heat exchanger temperature is made to drop below 0°C in order to increase the detection accuracy.) The indoor fan is made to turn on or off at the same time.

Checking the current setting data on the microcomputer memory

Those data can be checked by looking at the service monitor LED indicators, when the wiring error checking is over, during forced operation, at the stop of the system. The LED indicators stop blinking when the forced operation is over. LED1…Room A wiring, LED2…Room B wiring 1st blinking LED…Port A piping, 2nd blinking LED…Port B piping The 1st blinking LED means the room that is connected with Port A. The 2nd blinking LED means the one connected with Port B.

Ex: Suppose the LED indicators are blinking as follows.

The above means that Port A is connected with Port B, and Port B with Room A (or selfcorrected this way.)

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4. Trial Operation 4.1 Outline

RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series 1. Measure the power supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range. 2. Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating operation. 3. Carry out the trial operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and parts, such as flap movement, are working properly. The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption. If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system backs up the operation mode. The system then restarts operation with the previous operation mode when the circuit breaker is restored. In cooling operation, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating operation, select the highest programmable temperature. Trial operation may be disabled in either operation mode depending on the room temperature. After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level. (26°C ~ 28°C in cooling, 20°C ~ 24°C in heating) For protection, the system does not start for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

ARC466 Series (1) Press the [On/Off] button to turn on the system. (2) Press the center of the [Temp] button and the [Mode] button at the same time. (3) Select T (trial operation) with the [Temp] or button. (4) Press the [Mode] button to start the trial operation. (5) Press the [Mode] button and select operation mode. (6) Trial operation terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial operation, press the [On/Off] button.

Trial Operation and Field Settings

ARC452 Series (1) Press the [ON/OFF] button to turn on the system. (2) Press the both of [TEMP] buttons and the [MODE] button at the same time. (3) Press the [MODE] button twice. (T appears on the display to indicate that trial operation is selected.) (4) Press the [MODE] button and select the operation mode. (5) Trial operation terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial operation, press the [ON/OFF] button.

ARC433 Series (1) Press the [ON/OFF] button to turn on the system. (2) Press the center of the [TEMP] button and the [MODE] button at the same time. (3) Press the [MODE] button twice. (T appears on the display to indicate that trial operation is selected.) (4) Press the [MODE] button and select the operation mode. (5) Trial operation terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial operation, press the [ON/OFF] button.

(2) (1) (5) (2) (3) (4)

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

4.2.1 Check points To carry out test operation, check the followings: Check that the temperature setting of the remote controller is at the lowest level in cooling mode. Go through the following checklist: Checkpoints

Cautions or warnings

Are all units securely installed?

Dangerous for turning over during storm Possible damage to pipe connections Dangerous if electric leakage occurs.

Is the earth wire installed according to the applicable local standard? Are all air inlets and outlets of the indoor and outdoor units unobstructed? Does the drain flow out smoothly?

Poor cooling Poor heating Water leakage

Is piping adequately heat-insulated? Have the connections been checked for refrigerant leakage?

Water leakage Poor cooling Poor heating Stop

Is the supply voltage conform to the specifications on the Incorrect operation name plate? Are the cable sizes as specified and according to local Damage of cables regulations? Are the remote controller signals received by the unit?

4.2.2 Test operation BRC1D528 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

410 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Action Turn on the power supply more than 6 hours before test operation. Open the gas stop valve. Open the liquid stop valve. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pressing [ON/OFF] button ( ). Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button ( ) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and operate at test operation mode for 3 minutes. Press the [AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST] button ( ) to make sure the unit is in operation. Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button ( ) and operate normally. Confirm all the function of unit according to the operation manual. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.

Trial Operation and Field Settings

Before test operation

Turn on the power supply more than 6 hours before test operation. Open the gas stop valve. Open the liquid stop valve.

How to activate test operation

Press and hold the [Cancel] button ( ) for 4 seconds to enter the Field setting menu. Use the buttons to select Test operation ON/OFF and push the [Menu/ Enter] button ( ).

Test operation is displayed on the bottom of the basic screen.

Push the [ON/OFF] button ( ) within 10 seconds to start the test operation. How to check airflow direction

Check that the airflow direction is actuated according to the setting and push the [Menu/ Enter] button ( ).

How to deactivate test operation

Press and hold the [Cancel] button ( ) for 4 seconds to enter the Field setting menu. Use the buttons to select Test operation ON/OFF in the menu and push the [Menu/Enter] button ( ).

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.1.1 Priority Room Setting Outdoor electronic expansion valves are controlled to provide more capacity to the prioritized room. Setting method Turn off the circuit breaker before changing the setting. Only one room can be set as the priority room (By turning on one of the SW4 on the service monitor PCB of the outdoor unit). The control starts when all the following conditions are met. ∗ Priority room setting is made. ∗ “POWERFUL” signal from the priority room unit is received. Note:

The operation mode of the priority room unit has precedence. Cancellation of control The control function is canceled when the “POWERFUL” operation mode is switched off or 20 minutes elapse after “POWERFUL Operation” started.

When inverter powerful-operation is selected in the priority room

The prioritized room will be heated/cooled much more quickly (R1396)

Service monitor PCB Service monitor PCB Priority room setting switch (SW4)

Priority room setting switch (SW4)

Trial Operation and Field Settings

5.1.2 COOL / HEAT Mode Lock Use the [S15] connector to set the unit to cooling only or heating only. Setting to heating only (H): Short-circuit pins 1 and 3 of the connector [S15]. Setting to cooling only (C): Short-circuit pins 3 and 5 of the connector [S15]. The following specifications apply to the connector housing and pins. JST products Housing: VHR-5N Pin: SVH-21T-1, 1 Note that forced operation is also possible in cooling / heating mode. COOL mode (C) ∗ The illustration is for 68/75/80/90 models as representative. On 40/50/52/58 models, the location of the [S15] connector is slightly different.

Arrow view A A Main PCB A (R14567)

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.1.3 NIGHT QUIET Mode If NIGHT QUIET mode is to be used, initial settings must be made when the unit is installed. Explain the function of NIGHT QUIET mode, as described below, to the customer, and confirm whether or not the customer wants to use NIGHT QUIET mode. NIGHT QUIET mode function reduces operating noise of the outdoor unit at nighttime. This function is useful if the customer is worried about the effects of the operating noise on the neighbors. However, if NIGHT QUIET mode is running, cooling capacity is reduced. Procedure 1. Remove the SW5 jumper switch on the service monitor PCB of the outdoor unit. Once the settings are complete, reset the power.

Service monitor PCB NIGHT QUIET mode setting switch (SW5)

2. Install the removed jumper switch as described below. This jumper switch is needed later to disable this setting.

After removing (R10813)

5.1.4 ECONO-mode-proof Setting Outline

When installing in hotels, you can make ECONO mode ineffective on the outdoor unit.

The ECONO mode can be switched over between "effective" and "ineffective" by pressing the forced operation [ON/OFF] switch (SW1) on the outdoor unit and wiring error check switch (SW3) on the outdoor unit at the same time and holding them for 5 seconds while the compressor is stopped. The LEDs are lit in turn for 15 seconds to show the ECONO mode status. The factory setting is "effective". LED flashing order

effective → ineffective

ineffective → effective

3 or 4-room model 5-room model

Trial Operation and Field Settings

RA Indoor Unit - FTXG, FTXS, CTXS, FVXG, FVXS, FLXS, FDXS Series

5.2.1 Model Type Setting ARC452A1, ARC452A3, ARC466A6 The remote controller is common to the heat pump model and cooling only model. Use the DIP switch on the remote controller to set the model type. Set the DIP switch as shown in the illustration. (The factory set is the heat pump side.) • Heat pump model: Set the DIP switch to H/P. • Cooling only model: Set the DIP switch to C/O.

5.2.2 When 2 Units are Installed in 1 Room Outline

When 2 indoor units are installed in 1 room, 1 of the 2 indoor units and the corresponding wireless remote controller can be set for different address. Both the indoor unit PCB and the wireless remote controller need alteration. The method of address setting varies depending on the type of indoor unit and the series of wired remote controller. Refer to the following pages for the appropriate indoor unit and wireless remote controller.

(1) Remove the front grille. (2) Remove the electrical box. (3) Remove the shield plate of the electrical box. (4) Cut the address setting jumper JA on the PCB. FTXS-K, CTXS-K Series

ADDRESS : JA EXIST : 1 CUT : 2

JA JA JB JC FTXG Series

JA ADDRESS EXIST CUT

(Bottom of electrical box) (R12036)

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

JB JA JC JA ADDRESS EXIST CUT

FVXG Series (1) Remove the front panel, air filters and front grille. (2) Remove the screw, and remove the service cover.

(3)Turn on the DIP switch [S2W-1] on the service PCB.

1 2 3 4 OFF (R14630)

∗ Keep the other switches as factory setting (OFF).

416 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Trial Operation and Field Settings

FVXS Series 1) Remove the front grille. 2) Lift the sensor PCB fixing plate and remove the front shield plate. 3) Disconnect the connectors [S1] [S41] [S42]. 4) Remove the electric box (1 screw). 5) Pull out the indoor heat exchanger thermistor. 6) Remove the shield plate (8 tabs). 7) Cut the address setting jumper JA on the indoor unit PCB. 5) Indoor heat exchanger thermistor Connector [S42] Connector [S41]

4) Remove the screw. JA Address EXIST 1 CUT 2

(2) Sensor PCB fixing Front shield plate plate

6) Shield plate (R17290)

Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type

Cut the jumper JA on PCB. ADDRESS JA 1 EXIST 2 CUT

Cut the jumper JA on PCB.

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Wireless Remote Controller

(1) Remove the cover and take it off. (2) Cut the address setting jumper. ARC466 series

ARC452 series Jumper

ADDRESS EXIST 1 CUT 2 (R12037)

ADDRESS EXIST 1 CUT 2

5.2.3 Jumper and Switch Settings Jumper (on indoor unit PCB)

JB Fan speed setting when compressor stops for thermostat OFF. (effective only at cooling operation) Power failure recovery function

JC When connected (factory set)

Fan speed setting ; Fan speed setting; “0” (The fan Remote controller stops.) setting

The unit does not resume operation after recovering from a power failure. Timer settings are cleared.

<Floor Standing Type: FVXS Series> Switch (on indoor unit Function OFF (factory set) PCB) SW2-4 Upward airflow limit Exposed or half setting embedded installation

ON Set the switch to ON position when you install the indoor unit embedded in the wall to avoid condensation.

<Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type> Switch (on indoor unit PCB) SW2

Function Installation style changeover

FLOOR (factory set) When installed as the floor mounted type

CEILING When installed as the ceiling suspended type

For the location of the jumper and the switch, refer to the following pages. Wall Mounted Type: page 42, 45, 47, 50 Floor Standing Type: page 53, 56 Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type: page 58 Duct Connected Type: page 60

418 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Trial Operation and Field Settings

SA Indoor Unit - FCQG, FFQ, FHQ, FDBQ, FBQ Series

5.3.1 How to Change the Field Settings Outline

If optional accessories are mounted on the indoor unit, the indoor unit setting may have to be changed. Refer to the instruction manual for each optional accessory.

Wired remote controller

First code No. (4) (3)

To set the field settings, you have to change: Mode No. First code No. Second code No. Step 1 2 3

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Action Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field setting mode. Press the [TEMPERATURE ADJUST] button to select the desired mode No. If the indoor unit is under group control, all settings for all the indoor units are set at the same time. Use the codes 10 to 15 to apply this group control and proceed to the next step. If you want to set the indoor units of one group individually or if you want to read out the last settings, use the codes 20 to 25 which are displayed in brackets. Press the [PROGRAMMING] button to select the indoor unit No. for which you want to adjust the field settings. Press the upper part of the [TIME ADJUST] button to select the first code No. Press the lower part of the [TIME ADJUST] button to select the second code No. Press the [SCHEDULE TIMER] button to confirm the setting. Press the [INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION] button to return to normal mode.

Unit No. First code No. Second code No. Mode Step 1 2

Press and hold the [Cancel] button ( ) for 4 seconds to enter the Field setting menu. Use the buttons to select Field setting list and push the [Menu/Enter] button ( ).

420 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Use the buttons to select the desired Mode. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (Mode 20, 21, 22 and 23 have been selected), push the button to highlight and buttons to select the INDOOR UNIT NO. to be set. This operation is unnecessary when setting by group. Highlight the second code No. to be changed When setting by group, all of the second using the buttons, and use the code No. that may be set are displayed buttons to select the desired second code No. as “*”. Push the [Menu/Enter] button ( ) to display the confirmation screen. Use the buttons to select Yes and push the [Menu/Enter] button ( ). Push the [Cancel] button ( ) 2 times to return to basic screen.

When multiple setting changes are needed, repeat steps 3 to 7.

Trial Operation and Field Settings

5.3.2 Overview of the Field Settings

Remote controller thermistor Filter cleaning sign Indoor unit number of simultaneous operation system Simultaneous operation system individual setting

01 Approx. 10,000 hrs. Approx. 2,500 hrs.

Individual setting Completion of airflow adjustment ON/OFF operation

Start of airflow adjustment

Airflow adjustment is OFF

Thermostat differential changeover (setting for when using remote sensor) High air outlet velocity (for high ceiling applications) Selection of airflow direction (setting for when a blocking pad kit has been installed) Selection of airflow function (setting for when using a decoration panel for outlet) Airflow direction range setting External static pressure

Panel indicator (green) ON/OFF

Selection of the automatic control operation lock mode Dust amount setting

Drain pump operation with humidifying

External static pressure setting

Ultra longlife filter

Longlife filter type

Second Code No. Description of setting

Normal Lower Refer to Note 2. Approx. 1,250 Approx. 2,500 Approx. 5,000 hrs. hrs. hrs. Approx. 32,000 Approx. 48,000 No display hrs. hrs. The indicator The indicator The indicator lights up during can light up only does not light both air during filter up during both conditioning auto-cleaning. air conditioning operation and operation and filter autofilter autocleaning. cleaning.

1. Any function that is not available on the indoor unit is not displayed. 2. External static pressure (Pa) Mode No.

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5.3.3 MAIN / SUB Setting when Using 2 Wired Remote Controllers Outline

The MAIN / SUB setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. When you use 2 remote controllers (control panel and separate remote controller), set one to MAIN and the other to SUB.

The remote controllers are factory set to MAIN, so you only have to change one remote controller from MAIN to SUB. BRC1D528 Step 1

Action Insert a flat screwdriver into the groove between the upper and lower part of the remote controller, as shown in the illustration below. Gently pry off the upper part of the controller, working from the two possible positions. Upper part of the remote controller

Lower part of the remote controller (R11738)

Set the [MAIN / SUB changeover] switch on the PCB to “S”. The switch is set to MAIN (factory setting)

Set the switch to SUB. (R11739)

BRC1E52A7, BRC1E52B7 Step 1 2

Put on the power for both remote controllers. Determine which one is the sub/main remote controller.

When Error code: U5 - Connection under check Please wait for a moment is displayed on both remote controllers, push and hold the [Operation mode selector] button of the sub remote controller for 4 seconds.

422 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

After a few seconds, the basic screen is displayed.

Trial Operation and Field Settings

Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge

6. Application of Silicon Grease to a Power Transistor and a Diode Bridge Applicable Models

All outdoor units using inverter type compressor for room air conditioner. When the printed circuit board (PCB) of an outdoor unit is replaced, it is required that silicon grease (∗1) is certainly applied to the heat radiation part (the contact point to the radiation fin) of the power transistor and diode bridge. ∗1: Parts number of the silicon grease – 1172698 (Drawing number 3FB03758-1)

The silicon grease is an essential article for encouraging the heat radiation of the power transistor and the diode bridge. Applying the paste should be implemented in accordance with the following instruction. Note: There is the possibility of failure with smoke in case of bad heat radiation. Wipe off the old silicon grease completely on a radiation fin. Apply the silicon grease evenly to the whole. Do not leave any foreign object such as solder or paper waste between the power transistor and the radiation fin, and also the diode bridge, and the radiation fin. Tighten the screws of the power transistor and the diode bridge, and contact to the radiation fin without any gap.

<Example> The shape of electrical box and PCB vary depending on the model.

Take out a PCB Power transistor (TRM, TPM, IGBT, IPM, SPM, etc.)

Diode bridge (Diode bridge, Rectifier stack, etc.)

OK : Evenly applied silicon grease.

Trial Operation and Field Settings Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7.9CuT PROPELLER FAN 9.5CuT 7.9CuT

7.9CuT PROPELLER FAN 4-WAY VALVE

9.5CuT THERMISTOR ON HEAT EXCH.

CROSS FLOW FAN CROSS FLOW FAN FIELD PIPING

6.4CuT M FAN MOTOR M FAN MOTOR FIELD PIPING 12.7CuT

9.5CuT REFRIGERANT FLOW COOLING HEATING REFRIGERANT FLOW COOLING HEATING

4D065855B FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B

7.0CuT CROSS FLOW FAN FIELD PIPING M

6.4CuT CROSS FLOW FAN THERMISTOR ON HEAT EXCH.

M FIELD PIPING (12.7CuT)

FAN MOTOR FIELD PIPING

12.7CuT FIELD PIPING (6.4CuT)

CROSS FLOW FAN M FAN MOTOR (12.7CuT)

1.2.2 Floor Standing Type

FVXG25/35K2V1B FVXG50K2V1B INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT CROSS FLOW FAN FIELD PIPING

6.4CuT CROSS FLOW FAN FIELD PIPING

6.4CuT M FAN MOTOR FIELD PIPING

9.5CuT THERMISTOR ON HEAT EXCH.

6.4CuT M FAN MOTOR FIELD PIPING 12.7CuT

M FIELD PIPING (6.4CuT)

1.2.3 Floor / Ceiling Suspended Dual Type

FIELD PIPING (12.7CuT)

1.2.5 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

1.2.6 Ceiling Suspended Type

FHQ35/50/60BWV1B Indoor heat exchanger

1.2.7 Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FDBQ25B8V1

Refrigerant flow Cooling Heating

Gas pipe connection port

Liquid pipe connection port

Gas pipe connection port

RED YLW BLK BLK MRC W S80

WHT YLW ORG BLU BRN RED WHT BLK

V BLU W BLK BLK Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E SW1

BLK WHT YLW ORG BLU BRN RED M

BRN WHT YLW ORG BLU BRN RED

RED BLK WHT BLK ROOM D 1 2 3

WHT BLK BLK X4M 1 2 3

A WHT BLK ROOM D 1 2 3

L POWER SUPPLY L N L1R Z1C GRN GRN YLW X1M

3MXS40K2V1B, 3MXS52E3V1B L1R B S10

Y3E FIELD WIRING SW1

WHT YLW ORG BLU BRN RED S80

BLU W X11A RED YLW BLU V3

M1F M BLU BRN ORG WHT U V W

3.15A RED BLK WHT BLK YLW BLK ROOM C 1 2 3

W BLK BLK MRC / W PCB1 S40

BRN WHT YLW ORG BLU BRN RED

RED BLK WHT BLU WHT BLK YLW B X3M 1 2 3 X4M 1 2 3

WHT RED BLK ROOM C 1 2 3

30A BLK L WHT X1M POWER SUPPLY L N L1R Z1C GRN GRN YLW

BLK WHT BLK X5M 1 2 3

L WHT WHT YLW X1M POWER SUPPLY L N L1R Z1C GRN GRN

4MXS80E2V3B WHT YLW ORG RED GRN BLU BRN BLK GRY

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

BLK WHT RED FG GRN /YLW GRN/

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK A3P A1P S21

3D065507D FTXS20/25K2V1B, CTXS15/35K2V1B PCB 2

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK 6

WHT BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

PCB3 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

BLK BLK BLK BLK INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR PCB2

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK SW1

BLK BLK BLK BLK INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR PCB2

FVXG25/35/50K2V1B S27 1

FU H1P~H3P M1F M1S M M M1F

2.2.4 Duct Connected Type

2.2.5 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

M1P MS R1T MSW M4S PS X4A CN1

A3P X9A X2A (NOTE 3)

MSW M3S MSW M2S MSW M1S A6P A7P SENSOR KIT (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)

TO OUTDOOR UNIT NOTES , 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION SYSTEM THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT MANUAL. (MASTER) (SLAVE) 3. X2A, X8A, X33A, X35A, X36A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE X2M X2M X8A X36A R1T A3P X24A OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED. IN CASE OF USING X2A 1 1 AN AUTO CLEAN PANEL, SEE THE WIRING DIAGRAM OF IT. 4. CONNECT POWER OF ADAPTOR FOR WIRING TO TERMINAL 2 2 X1M A2P A1P BLOCK (X2M) OF INDOOR UNIT DIRECTLY. X2M 3 3 5. IN CASE OF MAIN/SUB OVERCHANGE, SEE THE INSTALLATION X33A X35A MANUAL ATTACHED TO REMOTE CONTROLLER. 6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS : RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : CONTROL BOX WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN REMOTE CONTROLLER PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE 7. SHOWS ONLY IN CASE OF PROTECTED PIPES. USE H07RN-F IN CASE OF NO PROTECTION. 8. FOR THE DETAIL, SEE WIRING DIAGRAM ATTACHED TO OUTDOOR UNIT. 9. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER. SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS.

2.2.7 Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FDBQ25B8V1

R1T R2T R3T RyF1-4 SS1

z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to purchase, please confirm with your local authorised importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local legislation. z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself. Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion. z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion. z Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings. If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.

Cautions on product corrosion 1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced. 2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor. Dealer Head Office: Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi, Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan Tokyo Office: JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan

zSpecifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of March 2012 but subject to change without notice.